Redi-Rock User Manual

Page 1


User Manual

The information contained in the User Manual has been compiled by Redi-Rock International, LLC to document the performance of the Redi-Rock products contained therein. It is accurate to the best of our knowledge as of the date of its issue. Information included in the User Manual has been prepared in accordance with generally recognized manufacturing principles and practices. This information should not be used without first securing competent advice with respect to its suitability for any general or specific application. Final determination of the suitability and appropriateness of this data for a given manufacturing purpose is the sole responsibility of the user.

No warranty of performance by Redi-Rock International, LLC or the User Manual authors is expressed or implied by the publishing of the following User Manual.

Revision Date: January 10, 2025

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Manufacturing Redi-Rock Blocks

Retaining Forms

Overview

General Production

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) Middle Block

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) Bottom Block

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) Top Block

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) Half Middle Block

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) Half Bottom Block

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) Half Top Block

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) 9 in (230 mm) Tall Block

60 in (1520 mm) Middle Block

60 in (1520 mm) Bottom Block

60 in (1520 mm) Half Middle Block

60 in (1520 mm) Half Bottom Block

41 in (1030 mm) or 60 in (1520 mm) 9 in (230 mm) Setback Middle Block

41 in (1030 mm) or 60 in (1520 mm) 9 in (230 mm) Setback Bottom Block

41 in (1030 mm) or 60 in (1520 mm) 9 in (230 mm) Setback Half Middle Block

41 in (1030 mm) or 60 in (1520 mm) 9 in (230 mm) Setback Half Bottom Block

41 in (1030 mm) Planter Block

41 in (1030 mm) Half Planter Block

Modified Top Block

Modified Half Top Block

Short Middle Block

Short Top Block

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) PC Middle Block

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) PC Bottom Block

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) PC Top Block

1-AT Middle Block

41 in (1030 mm) Anchor Middle Block

41 in (1030 mm) Anchor Bottom Block 41 in (1030 mm) Hollow-Core Block

Overview

General Production

52 in (1320 mm) XL Block

72 in (1830 mm) XL Block

96 in (2440 mm) XL Block

Overview

General Production

Straight Middle Block

Variable Radius Middle Block

Straight Bottom Block

Variable Radius Bottom Block

Straight Top Block

Variable Radius Top Block

Corner Middle Block

90 Degree Corner Block

Corner Bottom Block

Corner Top Block

Half Corner Middle Block

Half Corner Bottom Block

Half Corner Top Block

Straight Garden Top Block

Variable Radius Garden Top Block

Corner Garden Top Block

Half Corner Garden Top Block

Force Protection Middle Block

Force Protection Bottom Block

Force Protection Top Block

Freestanding Hollow-Core Block

Freestanding Half Hollow-Core Block

Freestanding Corner Hollow-Core Block

Freestanding Half Corner Hollow-Core Block

9 in (230 mm) Tall Corner Block

9 in (230 mm) Tall Garden Block

9 in (230 mm) Tall Two-Sided Block

Cap Forms

Overview

General Production

Two-Sided Cap

Three-Sided Cap

Four-Sided Cap

Three-Sided Half Cap

Step Forms

Overview

General Production

Three-Sided 48 in (1219 mm) Step

Three-Sided 72 in (1829 mm) Step

Column Forms

Overview General Production Solid Core Column

8 in (203 mm) Core Column

4 in (102 mm) Core Column

Column Cap

Textures

Limestone

Kingstone

Ledgestone

Cobblestone

Smooth

XL

Appendix

Block Setback Options

1-AT Geogrid Connection

Loop Holders & Lifteye Formers

Lifting Load Safety Sheet

XL Rebar Cages

Tools for Demolding Freestanding Blocks

J-Bolts and Clips

Product Data Sheets

Manufacturing Redi-Rock Blocks Safely

Thank you for choosing Redi-Rock International to help you make precast modular blocks. This user manual, used in conjunction with the Producer Secure Site, is intended to assist you in the manufacturing process.

This manual outlines general practices and procedures, but each manufacturer is responsible for creating a site-specific safety plan for their facility, as scenarios and situations vary across locations. If you need to set up a company safety program, we recommend visiting www.osha.gov or calling 1-800-321-OSHA (6742) to find safety-training materials specific to your company.

All manufacturers should abide by all federal, state, and local safety regulations.

Block Size Key

To help find the right block/form you’re looking for, throughout the Form Set Up areas in the manual each block section has its size labeled in color, in several areas. This is due to some forms having the capability to create more than one sized block.

If in need of assistance please refer to this key. Or call Redi-Rock at +1 866-222-8400.

length

block size options

RETAINING FORMS

Retaining Forms

General Production

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) Middle Block

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) Bottom Block

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) Top Block

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) Half Middle Block

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) Half Bottom Block

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) Half Top Block

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) 9 in (230 mm) Tall Block

60 in (1520 mm) Middle Block

60 in (1520 mm) Bottom Block

60 in (1520 mm) Half Middle Block

60 in (1520 mm) Half Bottom Block

41 in (1030 mm) or 60 in (1520 mm) 9 in (230 mm) Setback Middle Block

41 in (1030 mm) or 60 in (1520 mm) 9 in (230 mm) Setback Bottom Block

41 in (1030 mm) or 60 in (1520 mm) 9 in (230 mm) Setback Half Middle Block

41 in (1030 mm) or 60 in (1520 mm) 9 in (230 mm) Setback Half Bottom Block

41 in (1030 mm) Planter Block

41 in (1030 mm) Half Planter Block

Modified Top Block

Modified Half Top Block

Short Middle Block

Short Top Block

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) PC Middle Block

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) PC Bottom Block

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) PC Top Block

1-AT Middle Block

41 in (1030 mm) Anchor Middle Block

41 in (1030 mm) Anchor Bottom Block

41 in (1030 mm) Hollow-Core Block

Overview

The standard Redi-Rock Retaining form consists of a base and four hinged door panels – top, bottom and two sides – that close with binder clamps. The form can be configured with various inserts and extensions to create numerous precast modular blocks. By changing the face mold in the base of the form, various texture blocks can also be produced.

RETAINING FORM BASE 1 R002-A003 STANDARD TOP DOOR 1 R002-A007

BOTTOM DOOR 1 R002-A008

LEFT END PANEL WELDMENT 1 R002-A009 RIGHT END PANEL WELDMENT 1 R002-A010 RIGHT FORK SLOT INSERT WELDMENT 1 R002-A012 LEFT FORK SLOT INSERT WELDMENT 1 R002-A013 5-13 HEX NUT 4 5-13-HN 5 FLAT WASHER 4 5-FW 20 .75-10 -HN 10 .75-10 x3-HB

R002-A010 R002-A012

R002-A012

TITLE: Intro Form View: S PART No : R002-M009 PROPRIETARY AND

R002-A008
R002-A013
R002-A009
R002-A007
R002-A003
R002-A010
R002-A007
R002-A

2000-2005 Generational Door Panels

Retaining forms manufactured between 2000-2005 were fabricated with a “C-channel” structure on the top and bottom door panels. In 2005, the design was revised to an “angle” structure to improve rigidity during demolding.

It is strongly recommended to update the top and bottom door panels with the current angle structure design. Forms with the C-channel design may be susceptible to warping, which impacts the block dimensions, and increased demolding effort.

Setback Options

The block-to-block setback available with Redi-Rock is controlled by the size and location of the shear knobs cast into the precast modular blocks. While the 10-in (254-mm) diameter knob and the 1 5/8-in (41-mm) setback is the most common configuration, Redi-Rock has three different knob sizes and three different locations available for the retaining form.

See page ii in the Appendix for illustrations of the Block Setback Options.

"Angle" structure (2006-Current)
"C-Channel" Structure (2000-2006)
Figure A

Setback Option

Degree Setback

Knob Location

Retaining forms can be configured with different top panels to provide options for various knob locations.

Standard Panel R002-A007

Can be used to produce:

Standard Setback

Two-Way Panel

R002-A030

Can be used to produce:

Standard Setback

9 in (230 mm) Setback

Three-Way Panel R002-A018

Can be used to produce:

Standard Setback

9 in (230 mm) Setback

Planter Setback

Modification(s) to Create Setback Option

Universal Panel (Discontinued) R002-A007

Can be used to produce:

Standard Setback • Planter Setback

Knob Sizes

Retaining form knob formers can be modified to create various size knobs, which correlate to different setback options.

10 in (254 mm) Knob Former R002-A104

The knob casting is used to create standard 10-in (254-mm) diameter knobs.

Used to produce:

• Standard Setback

• 9 in (230 mm) Setback

• Planter Setback

7 ½ in (190 mm) Knob Insert R002-A160

Modified by inserts to produce:

• One Degree Setback

• Zero Degree Setback

The rubber insert is installed in the standard 10 in (254 mm) Knob Former to make a 7 1/2-in (190-mm) diameter knob.

Used to produce:

• One Degree Setback

Installation Instructions: Affix with silicone caulk. Do not overtighten.

Installation Instructions: Bolt to top panel of form.

6 ¾ in (171 mm) Knob Insert R002-A224

The rubber insert is installed in the standard 10 in (254 mm) Knob Former to make a 6 3/4-in (171-mm) diameter knob.

Used to produce:

• Zero Degree Setback

Installation Instructions: Affix with silicone caulk. Do not overtighten.

Product Data Sheets

For product data sheets, see these pages in the Appendix:

28 in (710 mm) retaining blocks ....................................................... page xxxix

41 in (1030 mm) retaining blocks ..................................................... page xli

28 in (710 mm) & 41 in (1030 mm) PC blocks page xliii

60 in (1520 mm) retaining blocks ..................................................... page xlv

60 in (1520 mm) wide, 9" (230 mm) Setback retaining blocks ......... page xlvii

General Production

Note: There are instructions specific to producing each Redi-Rock precast modular block throughout this manual. Please be sure to understand both the following general guidelines and the specific instructions before beginning to manufacture a Redi-Rock product.

Prep

1.

Set each of the forms as level as practical (level is not critical, however).

2.

To create the texture on the blocks, a rubber face mold is bolted to the face panel. When installing the mold, set it in place and close the form before tightening the bolts under the face mold. This ensures that the mold is centered in the form.

3.

Critical Note: Many of the face molds are reversible to increase the texture variations; however, the Limestone texture is not reversible. Be sure to install the face mold so that the thicker portion of the rubber is at the top of the form.

Scrape residual concrete from steel and rubber parts after each demolding operation. Concrete build-up will deform rubber molds and impact product quality.

Pay close attention to:

• Surfaces where steel contacts rubber

• The underside of the knob formers – this is critical for proper knob size and maintaining alignment during wall installation

• Around the loop holders before closing forms so debris does not fall onto the face mold

Helpful Hint: The rubber face mold should be free of debris before pouring blocks. Compressed air can be helpful if used safely.

4.

Apply a thin layer of release agent to the form surfaces. Over-applying release agent will adversely affect the finished product. Excess release agent can pool in the face mold, causing the surface to flake, spall off, or create bug holes.

Pay attention to hard to reach areas:

• Undersides of inserts

• Underside of knob formers

• Around and inside loop holders

For a list of appropriate release agents visit the secure site or call your business consultant.

5.

Place the lifting insert into the loop holder. Commercially available lifting inserts are offered by a number of manufacturers, and Redi-Rock producers have elected to use a variety of lifting inserts to safely handle Redi-Rock blocks.

Two inserts which are made from galvanized, A36 steel are shown here.

Manufactured by: American Step Company https://www.americanstep.com/ 830 East Broadway PO Box 137 Griffen, GA 30224-0137

Helpful Hint: Spraying the exterior surfaces of the forms will aid in cleaning but can also make them slippery.

Manufactured by: A.L. Patterson https://www.alpsupply.com/ (800) 332-7090 300 Ben Fairless Drive Fairless Hills, PA 19030

Helpful Hint: Depending on what lifting insert you choose to utilize, various loop holders are available to hold the insert in place. See page vi in the Appendix for a full breakdown of available options. Continued

3/8” Solid Loop Lifter
3/8” R Anchor

Safety Notes: For Step 5

• The Redi-Rock Licensed Manufacturer is responsible for safe lifting and handling of all concrete products created in Redi-Rock forms. The use of lifting inserts and associated hardware shall be in accordance with the printed safe lifting practices and procedures, as published by the manufacturer.

• The National Precast Concrete Association (NPCA) publishes the NPCA Quality Control Manual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete Plants. The manual provides guidance to help assure production of quality precast products, and includes many recommendations which are applicable to Redi-Rock Manufacturers. The section of this manual which addresses lifting inserts allows the use of smooth bars made of steel conforming to ASTM A36 for lifting inserts and apparatus (Commentary to Section 2.3.1). The manual also recommends that embedded steel shapes which will be exposed to moisture or other corrosive environments be galvanized (Commentary to Section 2.3.2).

• Wire rope lifting loops are not recommended due to accelerated corrosion potential that adversely affects block durability and safety.

• Blocks must be poured with concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. ASTM C94 specifies that mixing water shall be potable water. Do not use admixtures containing chlorides because Redi-Rock blocks contain metal embedments.

• Redi-Rock Manufacturers should obtain testing data which demonstrates the capacity of the lifting inserts exceeds the weight of the blocks with a factor of safety of 4 or greater. The capacity of the inserts should be checked when the blocks are in a green condition when they are stripped from the forms and in subsequent handling and setting conditions. For commercially available inserts, this test data should be available from the lifting insert manufacturer. If commercially available inserts are not used, the Redi-Rock Manufacturer should perform a testing program to demonstrate that the inserts are appropriate, meet all applicable specifications, and have a lifting capacity which will provide a minimum factor of safety of 4 or greater.

When closing the forms, close the side panels first, bottom panel second, and top panel third. Be sure to check the position of the lifting insert as the panel closes.

Attach binder on one side and apply pressure while pushing on the side panel to engage stops. Lock one binder. Position the other side panel if necessary to engage stops. Attach and lock the second binder. Double check the lifting insert remained in the correct position.

1. 2. Pour

Fill forms to the specified depth to produce blocks that conform to published dimensions and tolerances.

Finish the back of the block with a trowel.

Helpful Hint: After finishing the back of the block, make wedge-shaped notches on the side panel with your trowel in the wet concrete to aid in demolding the block.

Helpful Hint: Depending on your concrete mix, you may need to vibrate concrete during or after pouring to get the desired finished product.

After the back of the block is finished, place an appropriate lifting insert in the designated location.

Coding and dating blocks is easily done by scribing into fresh concrete on block back at this time.

Demolding

Safety Note:

Allow blocks to cure properly before lifting out of form. Proper cure times vary according to weather, concrete mix, and curing conditions. Lifting inserts typically have minimum concrete strength requirements to develop necessary lifting capacity.

To open the form, unlock and unhook the binders.

Use a pry bar at the upper corners. Do not hammer on forms.

Helpful Hint: If notches were trowelled into the back of the block, it can aid in prying open the side panels, especially if fork slots are installed.

Helpful Hint: Do not allow panels to slam open hard on rails. Protecting the form from unnecessary wear and tear will help to prolong the life of your investment.

To carefully lift the blocks, hook on to the back lifting insert(s). Before actually lifting blocks, shift the block back and forth once to break initial bond using a forklift or crane. This is important to avoid bending the steel frame within the face mold.

Safety Note:

The concrete blocks are heavy – refer to the specific information from the Block Library to determine requirements for safe lifting of each product. Always use load-rated chains, cables and hooks.

After bond has been broken, then lift vertically to clear the form before moving. Be careful that blocks do not swing and tear edges of the face mold.

To roll the blocks for storage purposes, lower the face onto a clean cushioned surface. These surfaces could include:

• Rubber belting

• Foam board

• Sand bed

• Old mattress

• Plywood

Critical Note: Once the block has been lifted, do not attempt to set it back in face mold. Serious damage may occur to the mold.

Gently roll the block onto the bottom by maneuvering forklift or crane.

It is recommended to break away concrete flashing at form seams and lift hook. This step makes wall installation easier and safe work for your customer.

Helpful Hint: Remember uncured concrete is easier to clean than cured concrete.

Storage

Moving the blocks into inventory can be done with a chain and hook, fork slots, or a lift/clamp.

Safety Note:

The height of the stacks of blocks will be determined by your specific location and safety standards.

Helpful Hint: For some blocks, lumber dunnage should be used to create level stacks.

Helpful Hint: For inventory purposes, it’s recommended to stack like blocks together. And remember, bottom blocks usually ship first.

Maintenance

Binder Adjustments

Binder tension loosens over time. When the forms are really easy to close or more flashing is appearing on blocks, it’s time to adjust the binders. Tension can be increased by tightening the nuts on the binder. Check regularly, and adjust as required.

Rubber/Polyurethane Mold Storage Worn Hinges

Redi-Rock molds are sensitive to ultraviolet exposure. Do not store in direct sunlight.

Protect all edges/lips of the mold from warping or deforming during storage.

If hinges are worn, consult RediRock for options.

R-28HT 28" (710mm) HALF

R-41T 41" (1030mm) TOP *

/ Limestone

28 in (710 mm)

Middle Block

28 in (710 mm) or 41 in (1030 mm) Middle blocks are used in gravity retaining walls.

R-28M 28" (710mm) MIDDLE

Face Texture:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Kingstone / Ledgestone

/ Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone

R-28HM 28" (710mm) HALF MIDDLE

/ Limestone

Block

RR-G-KF10-S 2 KNOB FORMER

Center of Gravity:

R002-A011 1 GROOVE FORMER

Center of Gravity:

.5-13-HN 8 1/2"-13 HEX NUT

.5-13x1.5-CB 8 1/2"-13 X 1 5" CARRIAGE BOLT .5-FW 8 1/2" FLAT WASHER

R-28B 28" (710mm) BOTTOM

R-28HB 28" (710mm) HALF BOTTOM

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

3. Center of Gravity is measured from the back of block.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone Cobble / Limestone

Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291kg/m3). Half blocks contain a fork slot on only one side of the block. Interface Shear knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102mm) tall. Smaller knob diameters are available.

Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer.

Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

Center of Gravity is measured from the back of block.

Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

Cobble
Cobble
5. Weights are 6. Half blocks contain 7. Interface Shear (102mm) tall.

RR-G-KF10-S 2

KNOB FORMER

R002-A011 1 GROOVE FORMER

.5-13-HN 8 1/2"-13 HEX NUT

.5-13x1.5-CB 8 1/2"-13 X 1 5" CARRIAGE BOLT 5-FW 8 1/2" FLAT WASHER

28" & 41" MIDDLE BLOCK

RR-G-KF10-S .5-13

Form Assembly

Knob formers (R003-A155) are bolted to the top panel with carriage bolts, heads inward.

STANDARD 41” POSITION

B = “B” Style Knob Covers

C = “C” Style Knob Covers

KF = Knob Former

Note Loop Holder position.

Loop holder is installed. See page vi in the Appendix for loop holder options.

Groove former (R002-A011) and face mold are installed.

Production Notes

Pour

To manufacture a 28-in (710-mm) block, measure 23 in (584 mm) above the parting line where the face mold meets the steel and pour to that line.

Helpful Hint: If the three-way top panel is installed, use the diagram to place knob formers and knob covers in the correct location to produce 41 in (1030 mm) Middle blocks.

To manufacture a 41-in (1030-mm) block, fill the form full.

Critical Note: Top of groove former should be 21 13/16 in (554 mm) from the top of the form.

Cobble / Limestone

Bottom Block

28 in (710 mm) or 41 in (1030 mm) Bottom blocks do not have the groove and are used at the base of gravity retaining walls.

R-28B 28" (710mm) BOTTOM

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

3. Center of Gravity is measured from the back of block.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

PARTS

R-28HB 28" (710mm) HALF BOTTOM

R-41B 41" (1030mm) BOTTOM

5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291kg/m3).

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

6. Half blocks contain a fork slot on only one side of the block.

7. Interface Shear knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102mm) tall. Smaller knob diameters are available.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

3. Center of Gravity is measured from the back of block.

AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

• RR 41IN STANDARD FORM, RR 41IN 9IN SETBACK FORM OR RR 41IN 3-WAY FORM

5. Weights are

6. Half blocks

7. Interface Shear (102mm) tall.

8. * 41" (1030mm) applications.

Form Assembly

2. 1.

Helpful Hint: If the PC kit is installed, see page 99.

The bottom block setup is identical to the middle block except that the groove former is removed. After removing the groove former, holes in the bottom door panel may be plugged with bolts if desired.

Face mold, knob formers, and loop holder are the same as for middle block set up.

Production Notes

To manufacture a 41-in (1030-mm) block, fill the form full. Pour Storage

2. 1. 1.

To manufacture a 28-in (710-mm) block, measure 23 in (584 mm) above the parting line where the face mold meets the steel and pour to that line.

To stack bottom blocks in the yard, use a spacer, such as a block of 4-in (100-mm) tall wood, to stack the blocks level.

Top Block

28 in (710 mm) or 41 in (1030 mm) Top blocks do not have the knobs, which makes it easier to finish walls in the field with final landscaping or coping.

RETAINING BLOCKS

Note: If the two-way or three-way panel are installed, the top insert is different than with the standard panel

Block Library

R002-A155 A/R LIFTEYE FORMER TYPE #1, 2PC. 28 in (710 mm) 41 in (1030 mm)

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL1)

PART NUMBER QTY

RETAINING BLOCKS

Block Library

28" (710mm) HALF

DESCRIPTION

R002-A105 A/R LOOP HOLDER #5 NO-RECESS HOLDER

R002-A145 A/R LOOP HOLDER #1 FOR 5/16" CABLE

R-41T 41" (1030mm) TOP * R-41M 41" (1030mm) MIDDLE

41" (1030mm) BOTTOM

/ Ledgestone

FL1) Compatible options must be selected separately and are not included in this assembly 2) GRAY COMPONENTS FOR REFERENCE ONLY

/ Ledgestone

/ Ledgestone

R-28M 28" (710mm) MIDDLE
R-28B 28" (710mm) BOTTOM
R-28HM 28" (710mm) HALF MIDDLE
R-28HB 28" (710mm) HALF BOTTOM
Center
Block Weight: Block Volume:
Cobble / Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone
Face Texture:
Cobble / Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone
Cobble / Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone
Cobble / Limestone
Kingstone
R002-A058

PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

• RR 41IN STANDARD FORM, RR 41IN 9IN SETBACK FORM OR RR 41IN 3-WAY FORM

• R002-A097 (INSERT FOR STANDARD DOOR PANEL)

• R002-A170 (INSERT FOR 2-WAY OR 3-WAY DOOR PANEL)

R002-A058 5-13 HEX NUT 2 5-13-HN 5 FLAT WASHER 2 .5-FW

PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION QTY PART NUMBER TOP BLOCK WELDMENT 1

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL1)

PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION

R002-A105 A/R LOOP HOLDER #5 NO-RECESS HOLDER

R002-A145 A/R LOOP HOLDER #1 FOR 5/16" CABLE

R002-A155 A/R LIFTEYE FORMER TYPE #1, 2PC.

2PC.

NOTES:

FL1) Compatible options must be selected separately and are not included in this assemb 2) GRAY COMPONENTS FOR REFERENCE ONLY

REVISION HISTORY

ZONE REV DESCRIPTION DATE APPROV C Added in loop holder for reference. Added in compatible option table. 6/2/2021

Form Assembly

1.

The top block insert (R002-A058 or R002-A169) is bolted to the top panel. The knob formers are removed, and studs align in holes. Tabs are provided to ease alignment.

2.

Groove former needs to be bolted to the bottom panel.

3.

Loop holder is bolted to the top insert in the center pair of holes.

Critical Note: Do not over tighten so as to deform rubber.

Critical Note: Knob formers may then be reinstalled if desired, but this may promote rust inside.

Critical Note: Top of groove former should be 21 13/16 in (554 mm) from the top of the form.

Helpful Hint: See page vi for loop holder options.

Top Block

Production Notes

Pour

1.

To manufacture a 28-in (710-mm) block, measure 23 in (584 mm) above the parting line where the face mold meets the steel and pour to that line.

2.

To manufacture a 41-in (1030-mm) block, fill the form full.

Storage

1.

To stack top blocks in the yard, use a spacer, such as a block of 4-in (100-mm) tall wood, to stack the blocks level.

Face

Block Weight:

Block Volume:

Center of Gravity:

Cobble / Limestone

Face

Cobble / Limestone

Half Middle Block

28 in (710 mm) or 41 in (1030 mm) Half Middle blocks are used to maintain a running bond in walls where necessary.

R-28HM 28" (710mm) HALF MIDDLE

R-41M 41" (1030mm) MIDDLE

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

R-41HM 41" (1030mm) HALF MIDDLE

Cobble / Limestone Center of Gravity:

SHEAR KNOBS @ 23 (584) OC, TYP.

Kingstone / Ledgestone

R-41B 41" (1030mm) BOTTOM

R-28HB 28" (710mm) HALF BOTTOM

R-41HB 41" (1030mm) HALF BOTTOM

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL1) PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Cobble / Limestone Cobble / Limestone

R002-A110 A/R LOOP HOLDER #2

R002-A148 A/R LIFTEYE FORMER TYPE #4, 1PC FOR 10" KNOB FORMER

/ Ledgestone

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

3. Center of Gravity is measured from the back of block.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291kg/m3). Half blocks contain a fork slot on only one side of the block.

Interface Shear knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102mm) tall. Smaller knob diameters are available.

* 41" (1030mm) Top blocks are not typical and used in limited

Half
Kingstone

PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

• RR 41IN STANDARD FORM, RR 41IN 9IN SETBACK FORM OR RR 41IN 3-WAY FORM

• R002-A099 (WEDGE)

NOTE: A HALF-BLOCK RETAINING FACE MOLD IS NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL1)

R002-A148 A/R LIFTEYE FORMER TYPE #4, 1PC FOR 10" KNOB FORMER

Form Assembly

1.

Knob formers and groove former are the same as for full blocks.

The half block rubber face mold is centered and bolted to the bottom of the form.

The half middle block wedge (R002-A060) is bolted to the bottom door panel. Be sure to center the wedge on the center rib of the face mold before tightening bolts.

4.

Two loop holders are bolted in the knob formers. It may be necessary to drill holes in the knob formers.

Critical Note: Do not over tighten so as to deform rubber.

Helpful Hint: See page vi in the Appendix for loop holder options.

Half Middle Block

noted otherwise. manufacturer.

R-28HM 28" (710mm) HALF MIDDLE

R-41M 41" (1030mm) MIDDLE R-41HM 41" (1030mm) HALF MIDDLE

Face Texture:

Center of Gravity:

SHEAR KNOBS @ 23 (584) OC, TYP.

Cobble / Limestone

Half Bottom Block

Face

Center of Gravity: Block

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone Kingstone / Ledgestone

28 in (710 mm) or 41 in (1030 mm) Half Bottom blocks do not have the groove and are used in the base course to maintain a running bond in walls where necessary.

41" (1030mm) BOTTOM

R-28HB 28" (710mm) HALF BOTTOM

R-41HB 41" (1030mm) HALF BOTTOM

5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291kg/m3).

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

6. Half blocks contain a fork slot on only one side of the block.

7. Interface Shear knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102mm) tall. Smaller knob diameters are available.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

3. Center of Gravity is measured from the back of block.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291kg/m3).

6. Half blocks contain a fork slot on only one side of the block.

7. Interface Shear knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102mm) tall. Smaller knob diameters are available.

8. * 41" (1030mm) Top blocks are not typical and used in limited applications.

Kingstone / Ledgestone
Kingstone / Ledgestone

• RR 41IN STANDARD FORM, RR 41IN 9IN SETBACK FORM OR RR 41IN 3-WAY FORM

• R002-A164 (WEDGE)

NOTE: A HALF-BLOCK RETAINING FACE MOLD IS NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL1)

LOOP HOLDER

KNOB FORMER

SHEET: HALF BLOCK - BOTTOM WEDGE

To create the half bottom blocks, a bottom wedge (R002-A126) exists where there is no groove former cutout. Install the wedge into the form.

Helpful Hint: If you want to modify the standard wedge (R002-A060) for pouring half bottom blocks, two options exist:

• Tack thin steel plates in place to cover the groove former cutout.

• After production, flip the block over and fill the groove with concrete.

Half Top Block

28 in (710 mm) or 41 in (1030 mm) Half Top blocks are used at the top of walls to maintain a running bond and do not have knobs, which makes it easier to finish walls in the field with final landscaping or coping.

Block Library

R-41T 41" (1030mm) TOP *

R-28HT 28" (710mm) HALF TOP

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Face Texture:

of Gravity:

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL1) PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION

Limestone

R-41M 41" (1030mm) MIDDLE R-41HM 41" (1030mm) HALF MIDDLE

R002-A105 A/R LOOP HOLDER #5 NO-RECESS HOLDER

Cobble / Limestone

R002-A145 A/R LOOP HOLDER #1 FOR 5/16" CABLE

R002-A155 A/R LIFTEYE FORMER TYPE #1, 2PC

(1030mm)

41" (1030mm)

NOTES: FL1) Compatible options must be selected separately and are not included in this assembly 2) GRAY COMPONENTS FOR REFERENCE ONLY

Kingstone / Ledgestone
Cobble / Limestone
Cobble / Limestone
Kingstone / Ledgestone
R002-A127

RETAINING FACE MOLD IS NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL1) PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION

R002-A105 A/R LOOP HOLDER #5 NO-RECESS HOLDER

R002-A145 A/R LOOP HOLDER #1 FOR 5/16" CABLE

R002-A155 A/R LIFTEYE FORMER TYPE #1, 2PC.

Form Assembly

The top block insert and groove former are the same as for the full top block. See page 27 for top block assembly instructions.

2.

The half block rubber face mold is centered and bolted to the bottom of the form.

Half top block wedge (R002-A127) is bolted to the bottom door panel. Be sure to center the wedge on the center rib of the face mold before tightening bolts.

3. 4. 1.

Two loop holders are bolted to the top block insert in the outermost pairs of holes.

Critical Note: Do not over tighten so as to deform rubber.

Helpful Hint: See page vi in the Appendix for loop holder options.

Tall Block

BLOCKS

Block Library

Block Library

28 in (710 mm) or 41 in (1030 mm) 9 in (230 mm) Tall blocks are predominantly used to gradually reduce the height of the wall from the traditional 18 in (457 mm) transition between courses.

BLOCKS

FREESTANDING BLOCKS

Block Library

Block Library

9" (230 mm) STEPDOWN TOP

Kingstone / Ledgestone

9" (230 mm) STEPDOWN TOP

Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

Kingstone / Ledgestone

PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

• RR 41IN STANDARD FORM, RR 41IN 9IN SETBACK FORM OR RR 41IN 3-WAY FORM

• R002-A165 (9 IN TALL TOP INSERT)

• R002-A167 (9 IN TALL BOTTOM INSERT)

• R002-A166 (9 IN TALL GROOVE FORMER)

NOTE: A 9IN TALL RETAINING FACE MOLD IS NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

Form Assembly

9INCH TOP BLOCK

Remove the face mold and groove former from the form.

2. 1.

Install the 9 in (230 mm) bottom block insert (R002-A139) into the bottom panel using the groove former holes.

Note: If pouring middle or top blocks, install the 9 in (230 mm) block groove former (R002-A140) onto the insert before installing the insert in the form. There will not be a way to attach the groove former after the insert is installed.

Hint: If pouring bottom

the groove former.

R002-A144
R002-A144
R002-A139
R002-A140

Install the 9 in (230 mm) tall face mold (R002-A133) into the bottom of the form.

If pouring a top block, remove the knob formers and install the 3-in (76-mm) deep top insert (R002-A144) in the standard holes.

Production Notes

To manufacture a 28-in (710-mm) block, measure 23 in (584mm) above the parting line where the face mold meets the steel and pour to that line.

To manufacture a 41-in (1030-mm) block, fill the form full.

Maintenance, Tips & Tricks

The shallower groove former on 9 in (230 mm) tall blocks only fits over 6 3/4in (171 mm) or 7 1/2in (190 mm) knobs. Blocks used in the wall design beneath 9 in (230 mm) tall blocks should not have a standard 10 in (254 mm) knob.

Helpful Hint: If pouring a middle or bottom block, the knob formers would remain installed.

9 in Tall
Block

60 in (1520 mm)

Middle Block

60 in (1520 mm) Middle blocks are used in gravity retaining walls.

RETAINING BLOCKS

Block Library

R-60M 60" (1520mm) MIDDLE

Face Texture:

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

R-60HM 60" (1520mm) HALF MIDDLE

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Center of Gravity:

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Face Texture:

Face Texture: Cobble / Limestone

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Center of Gravity:

R-60B 60" (1520mm) BOTTOM

Face Texture:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Center of Gravity:

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone Kingstone / Ledgestone

R-60HB 60" (1520mm) HALF

Face Texture:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Center of Gravity:

BOTTOM

Cobble / Limestone

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

3. Center of Gravity is measured from the back of block.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may

5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291kg/m3).

60" (1520 mm) are typically used at the bottom of taller walls.

• RR 41IN STANDARD FORM, RR 41IN 9IN SETBACK FORM OR RR 41IN 3-WAY FORM

• R002-A038 (60 IN KIT)

R002-A122 (OPTIONAL

60" MIDDLE WITH FORKSLOTS

WITH

Form Assembly

1.

The 60 in (1520 mm) retaining kit is a retro-fit kit for the standard 41 in (1030 mm) retaining block form. To install it, four holes will need to be drilled in each door panel.

2. 3.

Align the right side door panel extension (R002-A033) to the right side door panel using the ribs, inside surface and edges of the panel as a guide. Bend the ribs if necessary to align. Once the surface and edges are aligned, mark and drill top four 5/8-in (16-mm) or 3/4-in (19-mm) holes.

Install four bolts and tighten nuts. Check alignment again.

4.

Repeat step 2 and 3 for the left side door panel extension (R002-A036).

5.

Close the form and latch the binders. Place the top and bottom door panel extensions (R002-A034) on top and bottom door panels. Latch the binders on the extensions. Tighten binder spring tension if necessary. Grind the alignment tabs as necessary to make the panels flush.

6.

Check the alignment of the inside surfaces. Mark the four holes on each door panel. Remove the top and bottom extensions and drill four 5/8-in (16-mm) or 3/4-in (19-mm) holes on each panel.

Helpful Hint: The bottom panel extension has two holes for the middle wedge extension.

Place top and bottom extensions again. Install and finger tighten four bolts in each panel. Latch the binders again. Check the alignments of the inside surfaces with a straight edge. If shims are required, install now. 7.

9. 8.

Once all adjustments are final, tighten all eight bolts very tight with an impact wrench. This will hold everything in place.

If groove former, knob formers, loop holder, and fork slot extensions are not already installed, do so now.

Safety Note:

Make sure the lifting device insert has adequate capacity to lift the block. It may be necessary to use more than one insert in the back of the block.

Critical Note: Double check that extension doors are flat with existing doors often. If the extension becomes out of alignment, blocks will not be flat and adversely affect installation.

Middle Block

Production Notes

Pour

Safety Note:

With the height of the 60 in (1520 mm) form, using a safety ladder is recommended.

Demolding

1.

When opening the form, pry open the top and bottom door panels first to clear the stops.

2.

Pry open the side door panels using the two positions shown.

Critical Note: With the extensions on, the door panels are heavy. Do not allow them to slam against the bump rails.

Helpful Hint: If notches were created in the back of the block during the pouring process, they can aid in prying open the side door panels, especially if fork slots are installed.

Storage

Lift the block from the form using two rated chains and two lifting devices, if necessary.

Safety Note:

Helpful Hint: After troweling the back of the block, making wedge-shaped notches in the wet concrete along the side door panels can later help in the demolding process.

Critical Note: A 60-in (1520mm) block weighs about 3,300 lbs (1500 kg).

Use extreme caution when working around heavy loads like this. The load may fall causing injury or death. Never work under the load.

60 in (1520 mm)

Bottom Block

60 in (1520 mm) Bottom blocks are used in the base course in gravity retaining walls.

R-60B 60" (1520mm) BOTTOM

R-60B 60" (1520mm) BOTTOM R-60HB 60" (1520mm) HALF BOTTOM

Face Texture:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Center of Gravity:

Cobble / Limestone

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

3. Center of Gravity is measured from the back of block.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

TH FORKSLOTS

Face Texture:

Center of Gravity:

Cobble / Limestone

5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft (2291kg/m3).

6. 60" (1520 mm) are typically used at the bottom of taller walls.

7. Half blocks contain a fork slot on only one side of the block.

8. Interface Shear knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102mm) tall. Smaller knob diameters are available.

Bottom Block

PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

• RR 41IN STANDARD FORM, RR 41IN 9IN SETBACK FORM OR RR 41IN 3-WAY FORM

• R002-A038 (60 IN KIT)

• R002-A122 (OPTIONAL FORKSLOT ADAPTERS)

60" BOTTOM WITH FORKSLOTS

Form Assembly

The bottom block setup is identical to the middle block except that the groove former is removed. After removing the groove former, holes in the bottom door panel may be plugged with bolts if desired.

Production Notes

Pour & Demold

Production for the 60 in (1520 mm) Bottom block is the same as the middle block. See page 46 for production notes.

Storage

Helpful Hint: To stack 60 in (1520 mm) Bottom blocks in the yard, use a spacer, such as block of wood 4 in (100 mm) tall, to stack the blocks level.

Bottom Block

(1520

Half Middle Block

60 in (1520 mm) Half Middle blocks are used to maintain a running bond in walls where necessary.

R-60HM 60" (1520mm) HALF MIDDLE

Cobble / Limestone

BOTTOM

PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

• RR 41IN STANDARD FORM, RR 41IN 9IN SETBACK FORM OR RR 41IN 3-WAY FORM

• R002-A038 (60 IN KIT)

• R002-A122 (OPTIONAL FORKSLOT ADAPTERS)

• R002-A099 (WEDGE)

• R002-A103 (60IN WEDGE EXTENSION)

NOTE: A HALF-BLOCK RETAINING FACE MOLD IS NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

60" HALF MID

Form Assembly

1.

A 60-in (1520-mm) middle wedge extension (R002-A062) is availab extend the 41-in (1030-mm) middle wedge (R002-A060) to create the 60 in (1520 mm) Half Middle block.

2.

60" HALF MIDDLE

Once the 41-in (1030-mm) middle wedge is installed, slot the lifting loop of the 41-in (1030-mm) wedge into the hole on the bottom of the 60in (1520-mm) wedge extension. Then attach the wedge using the two holes on the bottom door panel.

otherwise. manufacturer.

60 in (1520 mm)

Half Bottom Block

60 in (1520 mm) Half Bottom blocks are used to maintain a running bond in the base course in gravity retaining walls.

R-60HB 60" (1520mm) HALF BOTTOM

R-60HB 60" (1520mm) HALF BOTTOM

5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291kg/m3).

6. 60" (1520 mm) are typically used at the bottom of taller walls.

7. Half blocks contain a fork slot on only one side of the block.

8. Interface Shear knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102mm) tall. Smaller knob diameters are available. Cobble / Limestone Center of

PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

• RR 41IN STANDARD FORM, RR 41IN 9IN SETBACK FORM, OR RR 41IN 3-WAY FORM

• R002-A038 (60 IN KIT)

• R002-A122 (OPTIONAL FORKSLOT ADAPTERS)

• R002-A164 (WEDGE)

• R002-A103 (60IN WEDGE EXTENSION)

NOTE: A HALF-BLOCK RETAINING FACE MOLD IS NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

PARTS LIST

R002-A062

60" HALFBLOCK WELDMENT 1

R002-A126 .5 FLAT WASHER 4 5-FW 5-13 HEX NUT 4 5-13-HN

HALF BLOCK WELDMENT 1

Form Assembly

1.

60" HALF BOTTOM

To create the half bottom blocks, a bottom wedge (R002-A126) exists where there is no groove former cutout. Install the wedge into the form, and attach the wedge extension (R002-A062).

Helpful Hint: If you want to modify the standard wedge (R002-A060) for pouring half bottom blocks, two options exist:

• Tack thin steel plates in place to cover the groove former cutout

• After production, flip the block over and fill the groove with concrete

41 in (1030 mm) 60 in (1520 mm)

Setback Middle Block

41 in (1030 mm) and 60 in (1520 mm) 9 in (230 mm) Setback blocks are used to create a large batter angle (27.5 degrees) for gravity walls.

BLOCKS

Note: See page 11 in the introduction to this section and page ii in the Appendix for more information on setback options.

BLOCKS

Block Library

Block Library

Kingstone / Ledgestone

RETAINING BLOCKS

RETAINING BLOCKS

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Block Library

Block Library

Block Library

60" (1520mm) MIDDLE 9" (230mm) SETBACK

Kingstone / Ledgestone

RETAINING BLOCKS Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

60"

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Face Texture:

Center of Gravity:

Cobble / Limestone

/ Ledgestone Kingstone / Ledgestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

(800 mm)

Center of Gravity: Block Weight:

Kingstone / Ledgestone
Kingstone / Ledgestone

Form Assembly Option 1 - Two-Way Panel

PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

• RR 41IN 9IN SETBACK FORM

• R002-A038 (60 IN KIT)

• R002-A122 (OPTIONAL FORKSLOT ADAPTERS)

PARTS LIST PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION

R002-A024 2 COVER "D" ASSEMBLY

RR-G-KF10-S 2 10" KNOB FORMER .5-13-HN 14 5-13 HEX NUT

5-13X1 5 - CB 14 .5-13X1.5 CARRIAGE BOLT .5-FW 14 .5 FLAT WASHER

R002-A024

Note: The two-way panel (R002-A030) is sometimes also referred to as the 9 in (230 mm) setback panel.

1.

The two-way panel shown at right is installed on a standard retaining cell in place of the standard top panel. The panel can also make standard 41-in (1030-mm) retaining blocks.

2.

Install the knob cover D (R002-A024) in the standard knob hole locations. Install the two, 10 in (254 mm) knob formers (R003-A155) at the setback location.

3.

If pouring a 60-in (1520-mm) block and the form is not already configured, see page 42 for how to transform the standard retaining form to the 60-in (1520-mm) form.

Form Assembly Option 2 - Three-Way Top Panel

PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

• RR 41IN 3-WAY FORM

• R002-A038 (60 IN KIT)

• R002-A122 (OPTIONAL FORKSLOT ADAPTERS)

2

RR-G-KF10-S 2 KNOB FORMER

5-13X1 5-CB 14 .5-13X1.5 CARRIAGE BOLT

5-13-HN 14 .5-13 HEX NUT

3WAY 9" SETBACK MIDDLE BLOCK

R002-A018
R002-A018

2. 1.

To set up your three-way top panel (R002-A018) to produce 9 in (230 mm) Setback blocks, see diagram.

9” SET BACK POSITION B = “B” Style Knob Covers

KF = Knob Former

D = “D” Style Knob Covers

Note Loop Holder position.

If pouring a 60-in (1520-mm) block and the form is not already configured, see page 42 for how to transform the standard retaining form to the 60-in (1520-mm) form.

Form Assembly Option 3 - Retrofit Standard Panel

A steel template (R002-0296) is available to retrofit your standard top panel to also create 9 in (230 mm) Setback blocks. The template will be used to cut holes in the standard top panel for the different knob location, and knob cover D (R002-A024) will be used to cover the original knob locations.

Align the template up with the existing knob and bolt holes. Clamp in place.

Mark and cut hole for the new knob location and drill holes for the bolt locations for the knob covers.

Turn the template over to mark the other half of the panel and repeat the process.

If pouring a 60-in (1520-mm) block and the form is not already configured, see page 42 for how to transform the standard retaining form to the 60-in (1520-mm) form.

Critical Note: Do not duplicate the line of holes in the center of the panel.

Notes

Double check that the loop holder is in the correct location for 9 in (230 mm) Setback blocks.

Storage

To stack 9 in (230 mm) Setback blocks in the yard, use a spacer, such as a block of wood 4-in (100-mm) tall, to stack the blocks level. Or alternate blocks as shown at right.

Block Library

41 in (1030 mm) 60 in (1520 mm)

Block Library

Setback Bottom Block

The 9 in (230 mm) Setback Bottom blocks are used at the bottom of large batter angle walls.

Note: See page 11 in the introduction to this section and page ii in the Appendix for more information on setback options.

RETAINING BLOCKS

Block Library

Face Texture:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Center of Gravity:

Cobble / Limestone

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

3. Center of Gravity is measured from the back of block.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

Face Texture:

Center of Gravity: Block Weight:

of

Cobble / Limestone

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Ledgestone Kingstone / Ledgestone

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291kg/m3).

6. Half blocks contain a fork slot on only one side of the block.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

3. Center of Gravity is measured from the back of block.

7. Interface Shear knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102 mm) tall.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

Form Assembly Option 1 - Two-Way Panel

• RR 41IN 9IN SETBACK FORM OR RR 41IN 3-WAY FORM

• R002-A038 (60 IN KIT)

• R002-A122 (OPTIONAL FORKSLOT ADAPTERS)

IF POURING A 60 IN (1520 MM) 9 IN (230 MM) SETBACK BLOCK AND THE EXTENSION KIT IS NOT ALREADY INSTALLED, SEE PAGE 43 FOR INSTRUCTIONS.

The bottom block setup is identical to the middle block except that the groove former is removed. After removing the groove former, holes in the bottom door panel may be plugged with bolts if desired.

Face mold, knob formers, and loop holder are the same as for middle block set up.

Helpful Hint: Refer to the 9 in (230 mm) Setback Middle block instructions on page 55 for additional set-up instructions.

If pouring a 60-in (1520-mm) block and the form is not already configured, see page 42 for how to transform the standard retaining form to the 60-in (1520-mm) form.

Production Notes

Storage

To stack bottom blocks in the yard, use a spacer, such as a block of wood 4-in (100-mm) tall, to stack the blocks level.

Form Assembly Option 2 - Three-Way Panel

PARTS

AND KIT

NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

• RR 41IN 3-WAY FORM

• R002-A038 (60 IN KIT)

• R002-A122 (OPTIONAL FORKSLOT ADAPTERS)

2 KNOB FORMER

5-13X1.5-CB 14 .5-13X1.5 CARRIAGE BOLT 5-13-HN 14 .5-13 HEX NUT

IF POURING A 60 IN (1520 MM) 9 IN (230 MM) SETBACK BLOCK AND THE EXTENSION KIT IS NOT ALREADY INSTALLED, SEE PAGE 43 FOR INSTRUCTIONS.

R002-A018

The bottom block setup is identical to the middle block except that the groove former is removed. After removing the groove former, holes in the bottom door panel may be plugged with bolts if desired.

Face mold, knob formers, and loop holder are the same as for middle block set up.

Helpful Hint: Refer to the 9 in (230 mm) Setback Middle block instructions on page 57 for additional set-up instructions.

If pouring a 60-in (1520-mm) block and the form is not already configured, see page 42 for how to transform the standard retaining form to the 60-in (1520-mm) form.

Production Notes

Storage

To stack bottom blocks in the yard, use a spacer, such as a block of wood 4-in (100-mm) tall, to stack the blocks level.

41 in (1030 mm) 60 in (1520 mm)

Setback Half Middle Block

The 9 in (230 mm) Setback Half Middle blocks are used to maintain a running bond in walls where necessary.

Note: See page 11 in the introduction to this section and page ii in the Appendix for more information on setback options.

Block Library

NOTE: FORM SHOWN WITH 60 IN (1520 MM) EXTENSION AND STANDARD DOOR PANEL. USE A TWO-WAY OR THREE-WAY PANEL TO ACHIEVE THE 9 IN (230 MM) SETBACK POSITION OF THE KNOBS AND ONLY POUR TO 41 IN (1030 MM) IF NECESSARY.

• RR 41IN 9IN SETBACK FORM OR RR 41IN 3-WAY FORM

• R002-A038 (60 IN KIT)

• R002-A122 (OPTIONAL FORKSLOT ADAPTERS)

• R002-A099 (WEDGE)

• R002-A103 (60IN WEDGE EXTENSION)

NOTE: A HALF-BLOCK RETAINING FACE MOLD IS NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

60" HALF MIDD

3WAY 9" SETBACK MIDDLE BLOCK

SHOWN WITH 60 IN (1520 MM)

R002-A020

Form Assembly

1.

Set up is the same as for the standard half middle block, except the knob formers are in the 9 in (230 mm) Setback position.

Helpful Hint: See page 31 for 41-in (1030-mm) set up and page 50 for the 60-in (1520-mm) set up instructions.

Production Notes

Production is the same as for the standard half middle block. 1.

Helpful Hint: See page 31 for 41-in (1030-mm) set up and page 50 for the 60-in (1520-mm) set up instructions.

/ Ledgestone

noted otherwise. manufacturer.

Setback Half Bottom Block

The 9 in (230 mm) Setback Half Bottom blocks are used to maintain a running bond in the bottom course of large batter walls.

Note: See page 11 in the introduction to this section and page ii in the Appendix for more information on setback options.

Face Texture:

Face Texture:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Block Weight:

Center of Gravity:

Cobble / Limestone

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Face Texture:

Block Weight:

Block Volume:

Center of Gravity:

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291kg/m3).

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

6. Half blocks contain a fork slot on only one side of the block.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291kg/m3).

5-13-HN 5-FW 9 in (230 mm)

3. Center of Gravity is measured from the back of block.

7. Interface Shear knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102 mm) tall.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

6. Half blocks contain a fork slot on only one side of the block.

7. Interface Shear knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102 mm) tall.

8. 60" (1520 mm) Blocks are typically used at the bottom of taller walls.

• RR 41IN 9IN SETBACK FORM OR RR 41IN 3-WAY FORM

• R002-A038 (60 IN KIT)

• R002-A122 (OPTIONAL FORKSLOT ADAPTERS)

• R002-A164 (WEDGE)

• R002-A103 (60IN WEDGE EXTENSION)

NOTE: A HALF-BLOCK RETAINING FACE MOLD IS NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE. PARTS LIST

NOTE:

3WAY 9" SETBACK MIDDLE BLOCK

FORM SHOWN WITH 60 IN (1520 MM) EXTENSION AND STANDARD DOOR PANEL. USE A TWO-WAY OR THREE-WAY PANEL TO ACHIEVE THE 9 IN (230 MM) SETBACK POSITION OF THE KNOBS AND ONLY POUR TO 41 IN (1030 MM) IF NECESSARY.

R002-A018

Form Assembly

Set up is the same as for the standard half middle block, except the knob formers are in the 9 in (230 mm) Setback position. 1.

Helpful Hint: See page 34 for 41-in (1030-mm) set up and page 52 for the 60-in (1520-mm) set up instructions.

Production Notes

Production is the same as for the standard half middle block. 1.

Helpful Hint: See page 34 for 41-in (1030-mm) set up and page 52 for the 60-in (1520-mm) set up instructions.

Half Bottom Block

41 in (1030 mm)

Planter Block

41 in (1030 mm) Planter blocks are used to create large batter walls with a 16 5/8-in (422-mm) setback.

Block Library

Note: See page 11 in the introduction to this section and page ii in the Appendix for more information on setback options.

RETAINING BLOCKS R-41PL 41" (1030mm) PLANTER

R-41PL 41" (1030mm) PLANTER

(1030mm)

Form Assembly Option 1 - Three-Way Panel

PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

FL1

1.

See diagram for planter setback knob former and cover positions.

PLANTER POSITION

KF = Knob Former

B = “B” Style Knob Covers

D = “D” Style Knob Covers

Note Loop Holder position.

DESCRIPTION 20 1/2"-13 HEX NUT 16 1/2"-13 x 1 5" CARRIAGE BOLT 2 1/2" FLAT WASHER

The planter block insert (R002-A174) is bolted through the outside holes in the D knob covers.

Groove former is bolted to the bottom panel.

2. 3. 4.

Loop holder is bolted to a planter block insert in the center pair of holes.

RR-G-KF10-S

R002-A020

R002-A024

.5-13x1.5-CB 5-13-HN

Critical Note: Do not over tighten so as to deform rubber.

Helpful Hint: For no planter trough, cover lower holes with D style knob covers instead of using the planter insert. It is often desirable to omit the insert to create a large batter wall without the need for soil to fill in the trough.

Form Assembly Option 2 - Legacy Universal Panel

PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

• R002-A101 (INSERT)

R002-A059

1.

The planter block insert (R002-A059) is bolted to the universal top panel. Universal top panels designed for planter blocks have four holes in them.

2.

Knob formers are placed in the top two holes while the planter insert covers the bottom two holes.

3.

Groove former is bolted to the bottom panel.

4.

Helpful Hint: When all other blocks are poured, knob formers are installed in the bottom two holes, while the top two holes are covered with knob covers.

UNIVERSAL PANEL PLANTER BLOCK

Loop holder is bolted to the planter block insert in the center pair of holes.

Critical Note: Do not over tighten so as to deform rubber.

Storage

1. Production Notes

To stack 41 in (1030 mm) Planter blocks in the yard, use a spacer, such as a block of wood 4-in (100-mm) tall, to stack the blocks level or alternate blocks.

Helpful Hint: For no planter trough, cover lower holes with knob covers instead of using planter insert. It is often desirable to omit the insert to create a large batter wall without the need for soil to fill in the trough.

41 in (1030 mm)

Half Planter Block

41 in (1030 mm) Half Planter blocks are used to maintain a running bond in large batter walls with a 16 5/8-in (422-mm) setback.

Note: See page 11 in the introduction to this section and page ii in the Appendix for more information on setback options.

R-41HPL 41" (1030mm) HALF PLANTER

R-41HPL 41" (1030mm) HALF PLANTER

Face

Form Assembly

Planter block insert is the same as for full planter block. Use the appropriate insert for your top panel.

Groove former same as for full planter block.

Remove full block face mold and install the half block rubber face mold.

The half planter block wedge (R002-A131) is bolted to the bottom panel. Center before tightening bolts.

Two loop holders are bolted to planter block insert in outer pairs of holes.

Critical Note: Do not over tighten so as to deform rubber.

Open holes may be covered with bolts.

Half Planter Block

Modified Top Block

31 in (803 mm) Modified Top blocks are used as an alternative to the existing top block with 8 in (203 mm) of recess to provide more space for soil and finished landscaping on top of the wall.

R-MT MODIFIED TOP

Face Texture:

Face Texture:

Cobble / Limestone

Cobble / Limestone

Face Texture:

Kingstone / Ledgestone Block Weight:

Block Weight:

Face Texture:

Block Volume:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Center of Gravity:

Center of Gravity:

SPECIALITY BLOCK

(540 kg)

/ Ledgestone

Face Texture:

/ Limestone

R002-A105 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #5 NO-RECESS HOLDER

Block Weight:

Block Volume:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

R002-A145 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #1 FOR 5/16" CABLE R002-A146 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #4

Center of Gravity:

Center of Gravity:

/ Ledgestone

(527

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

Half blocks contain a fork slot on only one side of the block.

3. Center of Gravity is measured from the back of block.

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

3. Center of Gravity is measured from the back of block.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary. 5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291kg/m3).

5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291kg/m3).

7. Interface Shear knobs are typically 10" (254 mm) diameter by 4" (102 mm) tall.

6. Half blocks contain a fork slot on only one side of the block.

7. Interface Shear knobs are typically 10" (254 mm) diameter by 4" (102 mm) tall.

R002-A105 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #5 NO-RECESS HOLDER

R002-A145 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #1 FOR 5/16" CABLE

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL1) PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION

R002-A105 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #5 NO-RECESS HOLDER

R002-A145 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #1 FOR 5/16" CABLE

R002-A146 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #4

R002-A146 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #4 FL1 PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION QTY PART NUMBER 5-13 HEX NUT 4 .5-13-HN 5 FLAT WASHER 4 5-FW MODIFIED TOP BLOCK INSERT 1 R002-A135

NOTE: FL1) COMPATIBLE OPTIONS MUST BE SELECTED SEPARATELY AND ARE NOT INC 2) GRAY COMPONENTS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY

Form Assembly

1.

Modified top block insert (R002-A135) is bolted to the top panel. The knob formers are removed and the studs on the insert are aligned in the same holes.

Critical Note: Holes may need to be drilled in the top panel at initial set up to get proper alignment for the insert depending on what top panel is on the form.

Helpful Hint: To achieve a better center of balance for lifting, you may need to relocate the loop holders.

2.

Groove former and face mold are the same as for all standard retaining blocks.

Production Notes

Pour

1.

To manufacture a 31 in (803 mm) Modified Top block, pour to the bend in the insert before it begins to taper.

Critical Note: Do not overpour Modified Top blocks, as the steel eye used to install the insert into the form may create a die lock condition.

Pour to here

Modified Half Top Block

Face Texture:

Block Weight:

31 in (803 mm) Modified Half Top blocks are used at the end of a wall or start of a run to maintain a running bond when the modified top blocks are being used for landscaping on top of the wall. 4.45 ft3 (0.13 m3)

Face Texture:

Center of Gravity:

710 lb (320 kg)

Cobble / Limestone 20.7" (527 mm) 4.95 ft3 (0.14 m3)

Ledgestone Kingstone / Ledgestone

lb (290 kg)

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Ledgestone Kingstone / Ledgestone

Face Texture:

Block Weight:

SPECIALITY BLOCK

Block Volume:

Center of Gravity:

SPECIALITY BLOCK

5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291kg/m3).

6. Half blocks contain a fork slot on only one side of the block.

7. Interface Shear knobs are typically 10" (254 mm) diameter by 4" (102 mm) tall.

5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291kg/m3).

6. Half blocks contain a fork slot on only one side of the block.

7. Interface Shear knobs are typically 10" (254 mm) diameter by 4" (102 mm) tall.

• R002-A138 (INSERT)

• R002-A157 (WEDGE)

R002-A136

Form Assembly

1.

The modified half top block wedge (R002-A136) needs to be bolted to the bottom panel. Center the insert before tightening the bolts. 2.

The modified top insert (R002-A135) and groove former are the same as for full Modified Top blocks.

3.

Remove full block face mold. Half block face mold is centered and bolted to the bottom of the form.

Critical Note: The steel eye used to install the insert into the form must be removed so it does not interfere with the wedge.

Production Notes

1. Pour

To manufacture a 31 in (803 mm) Modified Half Top block, pour to the bend in the insert before it begins to taper.

Helpful Hint: To achieve a better center of balance for lifting, you may need to relocate the loop holders.

NOTE:

Pour to here

Center of Gravity:

(533 mm)

Short Middle Block

Short Middle blocks are used in walls with double 90 degree corners to maintain the batter angle.

R-SM

SHORT MIDDLE

Face Texture:

Block Weight:

Block Volume:

Center of Gravity:

R002-A108 A/R LOOP HOLDER #1

Face Texture:

R002-A145 A/R LOOP HOLDER #8

(487 mm)

R002-A155 A/R LIFTEYE FORMER #1

Center of Gravity:

NOTES: GRAY COMPONENTS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

3. Center of Gravity is measured from the back of block.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

7. Interface Shear knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102 mm) tall. Smaller knob diameters are available. Cobble / Limestone

5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291kg/m3).

6. 27" (695) wide blocks contain a fork slot on only one side of the block. These are speciality blocks and may have limited availability and is only used in double 90 degree corner applications.

R002-A108

R002-A145

R002-A145

R002-A155

#1

R002-A155 A/R LIFTEYE FORMER #1

Form Assembly

1.

To install the 42.5 in (1080 mm) retaining block left and right inserts (R002-A184 and R002-A185), the fork slots will need to be removed. Then, install the inserts on the side panels.

2.

Critical Note: If the form has been modified to produce PC blocks, the steel wing kit must be removed prior to pouring blocks. They will interfere with the inserts on the side panels and prevent the form from closing.

Helpful Hint: If you want to use the fork slots, they will need to be attached to the inserts before the inserts are installed in the form. Trim the studs as needed to fit.

Install the 42.5 in x 18 in (1080 mm x 457 mm) face mold to pour Short Middle blocks.

Production Notes

Pour

Critical Note: When pouring short PC blocks, you must trowel a chamfer on the top edge of the block to avoid sharp edges that would be abrasive or could cut the geogrid when installed.

noted otherwise. manufacturer.

Short Top Block

Short Top blocks are used at the top of walls with double 90 degree corners to maintain the batter.

R-ST SHORT TOP Face

Face Texture:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Center of Gravity:

(0.13

5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291kg/m3).

6. 27" (695) wide blocks contain a fork slot on only one side of the block. These are speciality blocks and may have limited availability and is only used in double 90 degree corner applications.

7. Interface Shear knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102 mm) tall. Smaller knob diameters are available.

PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

Form Assembly

1.

To install the 42.5 in (1080 mm) left and right top block inserts (R002-A181 and R002-182), the fork slots will need to be removed. Then, install the inserts on the side panels.

Helpful Hint: If you want to use the fork slots, they will need to be attached to the inserts before the inserts are installed in the form. Trim the studs as needed to fit.

If the top block insert is not already installed, install now. See page 27 for instructions.

3.

Install the 42.5 in x 18 in (1080 mm x 457 mm) face mold to pour Short Top blocks.

Production Notes

Critical Note: When pouring short PC blocks, you must trowel a chamfer on the top edge of the block to avoid sharp edges that would be abrasive or could cut the geogrid when installed.

Short Top Block

R-28PCT 28" (710mm) PC TOP

R-28PCT 28" (710mm) PC TOP

Kingstone / Ledgestone

R-41PCT 41" (1030mm) PC TOP

Face Texture:

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Positive Connection Middle Block

28 in (710 mm) and 41 in (1030 mm) Positive Connection (PC) Middle blocks are used in reinforced wall applications where geogrid wraps through the center core slot to tie the blocks into the earth behind the wall.

R-28PCM 28" (710mm) PC MIDDLE R-41PCM 41" (1030mm) PC MIDDLE

28" (710mm) PC MIDDLE R-41PCM 41" (1030mm) PC MIDDLE

Face Texture:

Face Texture:

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Face Texture:

Face Texture:

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

R002-A043

Center of Gravity:

Center of Gravity:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

R002-A045 BOTTOM LEFT STEEL WING 1

R002-A051

23 (584) OC, TYP

R002-A052

R002-A053

Center of Gravity:

Center of Gravity:

R002-A050 BOTTOM RIGHT STEEL WING 1

SHEAR KNOBS @ 23 (584) OC, TYP.

R-28PCB 28" (710mm) PC BOTTOM

R-28PCB 28" (710mm) PC BOTTOM

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL1) PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION

Face Texture:

Face Texture:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

R002-0129 1 (FL2) PC - RELIEF PLATE - BOTTOM PANEL

Kingstone

Face Texture: R-41PCB 41" (1030mm) PC BOTTOM

Face Texture: R-41PCB 41" (1030mm) PC BOTTOM

R002-0358 A/R PC - DRILL TEMPLATE #2 - TOP DOOR

Center of Gravity:

Center of Gravity:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

R002-0359 A/R PC - DRILL TEMPLATE #1 - BOTTOM DOOR

Center of Gravity:

Center of Gravity:

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

3. Center of Gravity is measured from the back of block.

3. Center of Gravity is measured from the back of block.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

NOTE:

3) GRAY COMPONENTS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY

Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143

(2291kg/m3). Blocks contain a vertical slot for a 12" (300 mm) strip of geogrid soil

Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291kg/m3).

Interface Shear knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102 mm) tall. Smaller knob diameters are available.

Interface Shear knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102 mm) tall. Smaller knob diameters are available.

FL1) COMPATIBLE OPTIONS MUST BE SELECTED SEPARATELY AND ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THIS ASSEMBLY FL2) COMPONENT REQUIRED WHEN USING KIT. INCLUDE IF NOT PRESENT IN FORM, EXCLUDE IF PRESENT IN FORM

REVISION HISTORY

ZONE REV DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED A INITIAL RELEASE 16DEC2019 C NADOLSKY

R002-

COMPONENT REQUIRED WHEN USING KIT INCLUDE IF NOT PRESENT IN FORM,

NOTE: FL1) COMPATIBLE OPTIONS MUST BE SELECTED SEPARATELY AND ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THIS

FL2) COMPONENT REQUIRED WHEN USING KIT INCLUDE IF NOT PRESENT IN

3) GRAY COMPONENTS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY

Form Assembly

Remove all existing inserts from the top panel in the standard retaining form. Leave the bottom groove former and fork slot attachments.

Center drill template #2 (R002-0358) on the top panel.

Mark holes on the panel with paint or marker.

Drill 3/4-in (19-mm) diameter holes.

Critical Note: If your form is older and has angle iron rebar holders on the bottom panel, you will have to remove this before installing the PC kit.

Helpful Hint: Some holes may fit existing holes on the panel.
Helpful Hint: A MAG drill is recommended.

5.

To create the two slotted holes, drill three holes at the top, middle, and bottom of each slot then use a die grinder with a 1/2-in (13-mm) deburring tool to connect the holes.

Helpful Hint: Some people use a plasma cutter to cut the slotted holes.

Center the PC plate (R002-0130) between the 10-in (254-mm) knob holes. Place bolts through the top two lifting hook holder holes to hold the plate in place. The top of the mounting plate should be 19 1⁄4 in (489 mm) from the top of the panel.

After tightening bolts, hold the mounting plate flush against the top panel and tack weld it in place, so it seals tight against the top panel. The recommended weld locations are shown.

Bolt the PC top panel insert (R002-A043) in place. Tighten nuts on rubber insert until they are snug, and the washer no longer spins.

Helpful Hint: To help line up the placement of the rubber insert and steel wings so that the form will fully close, you can clamp the form shut with the side panels pushed out as far as they will go against the stops. Then mark the inside edge of the side panels on the top panel. Steel wings and inserts should be installed inside of this line.

Critical Note: Do not overtighten rubber insert or it will deform.
Bolts
Welds

Bolt the four steel wing inserts (R002-A050, R002-A051, R002-A052, R002-A053) in place. Fully tighten the nuts to secure the steel inserts to the top panel and provide a tight seal between the steel and rubber.

Bolt the PC slot insert (R002-A041) in place. Hold the insert in place and install two 7-in (178-mm) long, 1/2-in (13-mm) diameter bolts and 2-in (51-mm) springs through the top panel and into the rubber insert.

Replace 10 in (254 mm) knob formers.

Center drill template #1 (R002-0359) on bottom panel.

11.
12.

Adjust the groove former so the template is flush with the top of the bottom panel.

Critical Note: The top of the groove former should be 21 13/16 in (554 mm) from the top of the panel.

Mark holes on the panel with paint or marker.

Drill 3/4-in (19-mm) diameter holes. 15.

Bolt the PC bottom panel insert (R002-A045) in place.

Critical Note: Do not overtighten rubber insert or it will deform.

Helpful Hint: Some holes may fit existing holes on the panel.

Helpful Hint: A MAG drill is recommended.

The PC bottom plate (R002-0129) is a required component. If it is already in your form, skip this step. If it is not, weld the plate below the groove former now.

Critical Note: This plate is required.

Production Notes

When opening or closing the PC form, always work with the bottom panel first.

Check to ensure all rubber parts seal tight to each other.

• Check for a tight seal between the PC top panel insert (R002-A043) and the PC slot insert (R002-A041).

• Check for a tight seal between the PC bottom panel insert (R002-A045) and the PC slot insert (R002-A041).

• Check for a tight seal between the PC slot insert (R002-A041) and the PC plate (R002-0130).

When applying form oil, make sure the oil is applied to the underside of the PC slot insert (R002-A041). 2. 3.

When pouring a 28-in (710-mm) block, fill the form to the bottom edge of the flat spot on the steel wing kit. If the form is overpoured, flashing will occur that could cut the geogrid on the blocks above it.

Demolding

When demolding, pay close attention to lift the block from the form favoring the bottom panel. This will help pull the PC slot insert (R002-A041) from the block and reduce the opportunity for the insert to bind between the block and form and bend. It will also significantly extend the life of the rubber insert.

(710mm) PC MIDDLE

R-28PCM 28" (710mm) PC MIDDLE R-41PCM 41" (1030mm) PC

R-41PCM 41" (1030mm) PC MIDDLE

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Positive Connection Bottom Block

28 in (710 mm) and 41 in (1030 mm) Positive Connection (PC) Bottom blocks are used at the bottom of reinforced wall applications where geogrid wraps through the center core slot to tie the blocks into the earth behind the wall.

PARTS LIST

R-28PCB 28" (710mm) PC BOTTOM

R-28PCB 28" (710mm) PC BOTTOM

R002-A045

R002-A052

R002-A053

R002-A176

Kingstone / Ledgestone

/ Ledgestone

R-41PCB 41" (1030mm) PC BOTTOM

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Center of Gravity:

41" (1030mm) PC BOTTOM

Kingstone / Ledgestone

/ Ledgestone

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291kg/m3).

5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291kg/m3).

R002-0129 1 (FL2) PC - RELIEF PLATE - BOTTOM PANEL

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

6. Blocks contain a vertical slot for a 12" (300 mm) strip of geogrid soil reinforcement.

6. Blocks contain a vertical slot for a 12" (300 mm) strip of geogrid soil reinforcement.

R002-0358 A/R PC - DRILL TEMPLATE #2 - TOP DOOR

3. Center of Gravity is measured from the back of block.

3. Center of Gravity is measured from the back of block.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

R002-0359

7. Interface Shear knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102 mm) tall. Smaller knob diameters are available.

7. Interface Shear knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102 mm) tall. Smaller knob diameters are available.

R002-A173 (BOTTOM PC KIT)

Form Assembly

Remove all existing inserts from the top panel in the standard retaining form. Leave the bottom groove former and fork slot attachments.

Center drill template #2 (R002-0358) on the top panel.

Mark holes on the panel with paint or marker.

Drill 3/4-in (19-mm) diameter holes.

Critical Note: If your form is older and has angle iron rebar holders on the bottom panel, you will have to remove this before installing the PC kit.

Helpful Hint: Some holes may fit existing holes on the panel.
Helpful Hint: A MAG drill is recommended.

5.

To create the two slotted holes, drill three holes at the top, middle, and bottom of each slot then use a die grinder with a 1/2-in (13-mm) deburring tool to connect the holes.

Helpful Hint: Some people use a plasma cutter to cut the slotted holes.

Center the PC plate (R002-0130) between the 10-in (254-mm) knob holes. Place bolts through the top two lifting hook holder holes to hold the plate in place. The top of the mounting plate should be 19 1⁄4 in (489 mm) from the top of the panel.

After tightening bolts, hold the mounting plate flush against the top panel and tack weld it in place, so it seals tight against the top panel. The recommended weld locations are shown.

Bolt the PC top panel insert (R002-A043) in place. Tighten nuts on rubber insert until they are snug, and the washer no longer spins.

Helpful Hint: To help line up the placement of the rubber insert and steel wings so that the form will fully close, you can clamp the form shut with the side panels pushed out as far as they will go against the stops. Then mark the inside edge of the side panels on the top panel. Steel wings and inserts should be installed inside of this line.

Critical Note: Do not overtighten rubber insert or it will deform.
Bolts
Welds

Bolt the four steel wing inserts (R002-A050, R002-A051, R002-A052, R002-A053) in place. Fully tighten the nuts to secure the steel inserts to the top panel and provide a tight seal between the steel and rubber.

Bolt the PC slot insert (R002-A041) in place. Hold the insert in place and install two 7-in (178-mm) long, 1/2-in (13-mm) diameter bolts and 2-in (51-mm) springs through the top panel and into the rubber insert.

Replace 10 in (254 mm) knob formers. 11.

Center drill template #1 (R002-0359) on bottom panel.
12.

Adjust the groove former so the template is flush with the top of the bottom panel.

Critical Note: The top of the groove former should be 21 13/16 in (554 mm) from the top of the panel.

Mark holes on the panel with paint or marker.

15.

Drill 3/4-in (19-mm) diameter holes.

Bolt the PC bottom panel insert (R002-A045) in place.

Critical Note: Do not overtighten rubber insert or it will deform.

Helpful Hint: Some holes may fit existing holes on the panel.

Helpful Hint: A MAG drill is recommended.

17.

The PC bottom plate (R002-0129) is a required component. If it is already in your form, skip this step. If it is not, weld the plate below the groove former now.

18.

Critical Note: This plate is required.

Remove the groove former from the bottom panel and install the PC groove former (R002-A176) partial groove insert. Make sure this partial groove fits tightly up against the PC bottom panel insert (R002-A045).

Critical Note: The top of the partial groove former should be 21 13/16 in (554 mm) from the top of the panel.

Production Notes

When opening or closing the PC form, always work with the bottom panel first.

Check to ensure all rubber parts seal tight to each other.

• Check for a tight seal between the PC top panel insert (R002-A043) and the PC slot insert (R002-A041).

• Check for a tight seal between the PC bottom panel insert (R002-A045) and the PC slot insert (R002-A041).

• Check for a tight seal between the PC slot insert (R002-A041) and the PC plate (R002-0130).

When applying form oil, make sure the oil is applied to the underside of the PC slot insert (R002-A041).

When pouring a 28-in (710-mm) block, fill the form to the bottom edge of the flat spot on the steel wing kit. If the form is overpoured, flashing will occur that could cut the geogrid on the blocks above it.

When demolding, pay close attention to lift the block from the form favoring the bottom panel. This will help pull the center insert from the block and reduce the opportunity for the insert to bind between the block and form and bend. It will also significantly extend the life of the center insert.

28 in (710 mm) 41 in (1030 mm)

Positive Connection Top Block

28 in (710 mm) and 41 in (1030 mm) Positive Connection (PC) Top blocks are used at the top of reinforced wall applications where geogrid wraps through the center core slot to tie the blocks into the earth behind the wall.

RETAINING BLOCKS

RETAINING BLOCKS

Block Library

Block Library

R-28PCT 28" (710mm) PC TOP

R-28PCT 28" (710mm) PC

R002-A045

R-41PCT 41" (1030mm) PC

R-41PCT 41" (1030mm)

Kingstone / Ledgestone Kingstone / Ledgestone

BOTTOM LEFT STEEL WING 1 R002-A050

BOTTOM RIGHT STEEL WING 1 R002-A051 TOP LEFT STEEL WING 1 R002-A052

TOP RIGHT STEEL WING 1 R002-A053

TOP BLOCK CENTER INSERT 1 R002-A172 DIE SPRING: 1" O.D. x 1/2" I.D. x 1-1/2" 2 STD-0046 .5-13 HEX NUT 20 .5-13-HN 1/2-13x11" - HEX

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL1)

R-28PCM 28" (710mm) PC MIDDLE

PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION

41" (1030mm) PC MIDDLE

Face Texture:

Face Texture:

R002-0129 1 (FL2)

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Center of Gravity:

Center of Gravity:

41" (1030mm) PC MIDDLE R-28PCB 28" (710mm) PC BOTTOM

Face Texture:

PC - RELIEF PLATE - BOTTOM PANEL

Block Weight: Block Volume:

R002-0358 A/R DRILL TEMPLATE #2 TOP DOOR

R002-0359 A/R DRILL TEMPLATE #1 BOTTOM DOOR

Center of Gravity:

R-28PCB 28" (710mm) PC BOTTOM

Face Texture:

Face Texture:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Kingstone / Ledgestone Kingstone / Ledgestone Kingstone / Ledgestone PARTS LIST

R-41PCB 41" (1030mm) PC BOTTOM

Center of Gravity:

Center of Gravity:

NOTE:

FL1) COMPATIBLE OPTIONS MUST BE SELECTED SEPARATELY AND ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THIS ASSEMBLY FL2) COMPONENT REQUIRED WHEN USING KIT INCLUDE IF NOT PRESENT IN FORM, EXCLUDE IF PRESENT IN FORM 3) GRAY COMPONENTS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY

REVISION HISTORY

ZONE REV DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED B-1 B ADDED (2) STD-0046 & HB FROM R002-A172 28OCT2021 L.RADOY

R002-A045
.5-FW

PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

• RR 41IN STANDARD FORM, RR 41IN 9IN SETBACK FORM OR RR 41IN 3-WAY FORM

• R002-A171 (TOP PC KIT)

• R002-A097 (INSERT FOR STANDARD DOOR PANEL) OR R002-A170 (INSERT FOR 2-WAY OR 3-WAY DOOR PANEL)

FL2) COMPONENT

3) GRAY COMPONENTS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY

Form Assembly

To modify a 5-in (127-mm) steel top block insert (R002-A097 or R002-A170) for a PC block, remove the 3/8-in (9.5-mm) square bar (if present) from the face of the top block insert.

Center drill template #2 (R002-0358) on the outside of the top block insert.

Mark holes on insert with paint or marker.

Drill 3/4-in (19-mm) diameter holes.

Helpful Hint: Some holes may fit existing holes on the panel.
Helpful Hint: A MAG drill is recommended.

To create the two slotted holes, drill three holes at the top, middle, and bottom of each slot then use a die grinder with a 1/2-in (13-mm) deburring tool to connect the holes.

Critical Note: Do not overtighten rubber insert or it will deform.

Helpful Hint: Some people use a plasma cutter to cut the slotted holes.

Bolt the PC top panel insert (R002-A043) in place. Tighten nuts on rubber insert until they are snug, and the washer no longer spins.

Critical Note: Longer slots are required for the top block insert than the slots machined on the template.

Bolt the four steel wing inserts (R002-A050, R002-A051, R002-A052, R002-A053) in place. Fully tighten the nuts to secure the steel inserts to the top panel and provide a tight seal between the steel and rubber.

Cut a slot between the existing center solid loop holder holes. 8.

Place new rubber loop holder over new slotted hole. Mark the location of the two new side holes with a pencil. 9.

Helpful Hint: The holes are off center and should be located approximately 26 3/4 in (680 mm) from the top of the top block insert.

Bolt Loop Holder #5 on the bottom of the top block insert.

Note: Holes are offset towards the bottom of the Insert/front of block.

Use a forklift to place the modified top block insert into the form and bolt it in place.

Bolt the Top block center insert (R002-A172) in place. Hold the insert in place and install two 11-in (779-mm) long, 1/2-in (13-mm) diameter bolts with two 1 1/2-in (38-mm) springs through the top panel and top block insert and into the PC rubber insert.

Center drill template #1 (R002-0359) on bottom panel.

Adjust the groove former so the template is flush with the top of the bottom panel.

Critical Note: The top of the groove former should be 21 13/16 in (554 mm) from the top of the panel.

Mark holes on the panel with paint or marker.

Drill 3/4-in (19-mm) diameter holes. 16.

Bolt the PC bottom panel insert (R002-A045) in place.

Critical Note: Do not overtighten rubber insert or it will deform.

Helpful Hint: Some holes may fit existing holes on the panel.
Helpful Hint: A MAG drill is recommended.

Critical Note: This plate is required.

18.

The PC bottom plate (R002-0129) is a required component. If it is already in your form, skip this step. If it is not, weld the plate below the groove former now.

Production Notes

When opening or closing the PC form, always work with the bottom panel first.

2.

Check to ensure all rubber parts seal tight to each other.

• Check for a tight seal between the PC top panel insert (R002-A043) and the top block center insert (R002-A172).

• Check for a tight seal between the PC bottom panel insert (R002-A045) and the top block center insert (R002-A172).

• Check for a tight seal between the top block center insert (R002-A172) and the top block insert (R002-A097 or R002-A170).

3.

When applying form oil, make sure the oil is applied to the underside of the Top block center insert (R002-A172).

When pouring a 28-in (710-mm) block, fill the form to the bottom edge of the flat spot on the steel wing kit. If the form is overpoured, flashing will occur that could cut the geogrid on the blocks above it.

Demolding

1.

When demolding, pay close attention to lift the block from the form favoring the bottom panel. This will help pull the center insert from the block and reduce the opportunity for the insert to bind between the block and form and bend. It will also significantly extend the life of the center insert.

1-AT Middle Block

1-AT Middle blocks are used in reinforced walls with an anchored tail of geogrid wrapped around a fiberglass rod and sandwiched between the blocks. This is a legacy element of the Redi-Rock system.

R-1AT 1-AT MIDDLE BLOCK

Face Texture:

R-28M 28" (710mm) MIDDLE

Block Weight: Block Volume: Face Texture:

Center of Gravity:

(710mm)

Center of Gravity:

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

3. Center of Gravity is measured from the back of block.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

5. Weights are based upon a concrete

6. Half blocks contain a fork slot on only

Interface Shear knobs are typically (102mm) tall. Smaller knob diameters

Form Assembly Option 1 - Two-Way and Three-Way Panel

PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

• RR 41IN STANDARD FORM, RR 41IN 9IN SETBACK FORM OR RR 41IN 3-WAY FORM

• R002-A178 (LEGACY INSERT FOR 2-WAY OR 3-WAY DOOR PANEL)

R002-A177

Form Assembly Option 2 - Standard Panel

PARTS

AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

• RR 41IN STANDARD FORM, RR 41IN 9IN SETBACK FORM OR RR 41IN 3-WAY FORM

• R002-A117 (LEGACY INSERT FOR STANDARD DOOR PANEL)

1.

Install geogrid insert (R002-A116) in predrilled holes on the top panel.

Critical Note: Do not overtighten connector or it may deform.

Helpful Hint: For Redi-Rock forms purchased prior to March 2003, you need to drill six holes in order to fit the insert.

Production Notes

Inspect that the insert is sealed to the panel and has not been dented or damaged prior to pouring. Any damage to this insert will adversely affect the geogrid connection in the field.

Pour concrete to the top edge of the insert (see arrow).

Critical Note: Do not overpour the 28 in (730 mm) block. The insert is designed to taper at the back of the block to eliminate a rough back edge of the block, which could tear the geogrid under pressure.

Maintenance, Tips & Tricks

Maintenance

Regularly inspect the 1-AT insert to ensure it has not been dented or damaged. If the channel for the fiberglass rod is compromised the fiberglass rod won’t sit flat and it then reduces the connection strength.

Tips & Tricks

See page v in the Appendix for more information about the 1-AT geogrid connection.

41 in (1030 mm)

Anchor Middle Block

41 in (1030 mm) Anchor Middle blocks are used in reinforced wall scenarios that use soil anchors instead of geogrid to tie into the earth behind the wall.

R-AM ANCHOR MIDDLE

Anchor

• RR 41IN STANDARD FORM, RR 41IN 9IN SETBACK FORM OR RR 41IN 3-WAY FORM

• R002-A180 (ANCHOR INSERT)

1. PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

Form Assembly

Install the Anchor Block Insert (R002-A179) into the standard 41-in (1030-mm) retaining form in existing holes in top panel.

Anchor Bottom Block

RETAINING BLOCKS

41 in (1030 mm) Anchor Bottom blocks are used at the bottom of reinforced wall scenarios that use soil anchors instead of geogrid to tie into the earth behind the wall.

Block Library

R-AB ANCHOR BOTTOM

R-AM ANCHOR MIDDLE

Kingstone / Ledgestone

/ Ledgestone

Anchor Bottom Block

PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

• RR 41IN STANDARD FORM, RR 41IN 9IN SETBACK FORM OR RR 41IN 3-WAY FORM

• R002-A180 (ANCHOR INSERT)

Form Assembly

1.

Install the anchor block insert (R002-A179) into the standard 41-in (1030-mm) retaining form in existing holes in top panel.

2.

Remove the groove former from the bottom panel of the form.

Hollow-Core Block

41 in (1030 mm) Hollow-Core block is used in retaining wall applications and reduces the concrete used by 28% from a solid 41 in (1030 mm) block.

RETAINING BLOCKS

Block

Center of Gravity:

Limestone

Cobble / Limestone

/ Ledgestone

Hollow-Core Block

STANDARD PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION QTY PART NUMBER 10" XL KNOB FORMER 2 R001-0386 PC - MOUNTING PLATE - TOP PANEL 1 R002-0130

Top Door Insert, 41" Retaining H.C. 1 R002-A068 Side Door Insert, 41" Retaining H C 2 R002-A073

Groove Former, 41" Retaining H C 1 R002-A074

Bottom Door Insert, 41" Retaining H.C. 1 R002-A081 LOOP HOLDER #5 NO-RECESS HOLDER 1 R002-A105 5 FLAT WASHER 26 5-FW .5-13 HEX NUT 26 .5-13-HN 5-13 x 1 5 CARRIAGE BOLT 4 5-13x1 5-CB .5-13 x 2 HEX BOLT 2 .5-13x2-HB

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL1) PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION

R002-0245 A/R Drill Template #1, Top Door

R002-0247 A/R Drill Template #2, Side Doors

R002-0303 A/R Drill Template #3, Bottom Door

STANDARD PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION QTY

PART NUMBER 10" XL KNOB FORMER 2 R001-0386

R001-0386

STANDARD PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION QTY PART NUMBER 10" XL KNOB FORMER 2

Form Assembly Option 1 - Standard & Universal Panels:

PC - MOUNTING PLATE - TOP PANEL 1 R002-0130

PC - MOUNTING PLATE - TOP PANEL 1 R002-0130

R002-A068

Top Door Insert, 41" Retaining H.C. 1 R002-A068

R002-A073

Top Door Insert, 41" Retaining H C 1

Side Door Insert, 41" Retaining H C 2 R002-A073

Side Door Insert, 41" Retaining H C 2

Groove Former, 41" Retaining H.C. 1 R002-A074

Groove Former, 41" Retaining H.C. 1 R002-A074

Bottom Door Insert, 41" Retaining H C 1 R002-A081

Bottom Door Insert, 41" Retaining H C 1 R002-A081

LOOP HOLDER #5 NO-RECESS HOLDER 1 R002-A105 .5 FLAT WASHER 26 .5-FW 5-13 HEX NUT 26 5-13-HN .5-13 x 1.5 CARRIAGE BOLT 4 .5-13x1.5-CB 5-13 x 2 HEX BOLT 2 5-13x2-HB

LOOP HOLDER #5 NO-RECESS HOLDER 1 R002-A105 .5 FLAT WASHER 26 .5-FW 5-13 HEX NUT 26 5-13-HN 5-13 x 1 5 CARRIAGE BOLT 4 5-13x1 5-CB .5-13 x 2 HEX BOLT 2 .5-13x2-HB

R002-A073

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL1) PART NUMBER

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL1)

PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION

R002-0245 A/R Drill Template #1, Top Door

R002-0245 A/R Drill Template #1, Top Door

R002-0247 A/R Drill Template #2, Side Doors

R002-0247 A/R Drill Template #2, Side Doors

R002-0303 A/R Drill Template #3, Bottom Door

R002-0303 A/R Drill Template #3, Bottom Door

NOTES: FL1) Compatible options must be selected seperately and are not included in this as 2) This kit is configurable on Standard & Universal type retaining forms only

Changed loop holder from R002-0297 to R002-A105 Title Change 6/2/2021

.5-13x1.5-CB .5-13x2-HB

NOTES: FL1) Compatible options must be selected seperately and are not included in this assembly 2) This kit is configurable on Standard & Universal type retaining forms only. **CRITICAL LENGTH FOR ASSEMBLY*

AND

R002-A081 R002-A073 R002-A073
R002-A010
R002-A129
R002-A068
R002-A105
R002-0130
R001-0386
R002-A081
R002-A073
R002-A068
R002-A105

1.

Remove all applicable internal components from existing form as specified below.

• Knob castings

• Groove former

• Fork slots

• Hook/loop holder

• Bolted PC inserts

Helpful Hint: Face mold does not have to be removed from the form; however, removal is recommended to avoid damaging mold during form modification.

• All carriage and plug bolts

• All letter knob cover plates

• Any other options (i.e. 60 in (1520 mm) extension, half block insert, top block insert, etc.)

For forms currently equipped with PC plate only: Verify existing welded PC plate placement is correct by placing template #1 (R002-0245) on top door panel as shown.

• If PC plate mates to template, proceed to step 4.

• If PC plate mate does not match to template, remove plate with grinder. Make sure finished surface is smooth and flat.

Clamp template #1 (R002-0245) to top door panel, insert supplied PC plate as shown and tack weld plate to door.

3. 4.

Using center punch, mark six hole center locations given per template #1.

Critical Note: Template must be centered on panel. Actual panel(s) width may vary ± 1/32 in (0.8 mm) against template, adjust centering placement accordingly.

Remove template #1 from the top panel. If using the standard panel, proceed to the next step. If using the universal panel, reinstall existing 16-in (406-mm) setback knob covers. 5.

Hollow-Core Block

Using MAG drill with 5/8-in (16-mm) drill bit, drill all applicable holes through top door panel. Deburr all drilled holes as needed.

Helpful Hint: When using the universal panel, holes will also go through the knob covers.

Fully weld PC plate (R002-0130) to top door as per locations indicated in red.

Verify loop holder is installed to top door insert (R002-A068). If the holder was not previously installed, secure to the top insert.

Critical Note: Do not overtighten.

9.

Place supplied top insert (R002-A068) with loop holder into door as shown. Do not secure the insert to the panel at this step.

Install 10 in XL knob former (R001-0386).

Critical Note: Install knobs properly as shown to prevent die-lock condition.

After knobs are installed, secure the top insert (R002-A068) to the panel.

Reinstall all existing carriage (plug) bolts to top panel except for holes indicated in picture.

If the bottom panel on the form contains two angle structures, remove them with a grinder as shown. Make sure the finished surface is smooth and flat. If the panel doesn’t contain the angle structures, proceed to the next step.

Clamp template #3 (R002-0303) to the bottom panel.

Critical Note: Template must be centered on door panel. Actual door(s) width may vary ± 1/32 in (0.8 mm) against template, adjust centering placement accordingly.

Hollow-Core
Block

Using center punch, mark six hole center locations given per template #3, then remove it from the bottom panel.

Using MAG drill with 5/8-in (16-mm) drill bit, drill all applicable holes through the bottom panel. Deburr all drilled holes as needed.

17.

Place supplied groove former (R002-A074) into bottom door panel, then secure.

Critical Note: Groove former assembly orientation in panel is critical. Incorrect assembly will not allow the form to fully close.

Place supplied bottom door insert (R002-A081) into bottom door panel, then secure.

19.

Clamp template #2 (R002-0247) to a side panel.

Critical Note: Template must be centered on door panel. Actual door(s) width may vary ± 1/32 in (0.8 mm) against template, adjust centering placement accordingly.

Using center punch, mark six hole center locations given per template #2, then remove it from the door panel.

Using MAG drill with 5/8-in (16-mm) drill bit, drill all applicable holes through the bottom panel. Deburr all drilled holes as needed.

Place supplied side door insert (R002-A073) into side door panel and secure.

Repeat steps 19 - 22 on other side panel.

Hollow-Core
Block

STANDARD PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION QTY PART NUMBER

PC - MOUNTING PLATE - TOP PANEL 1 R002-0130 10" 3-WAY KNOB FORMER; HOLLOW CORE 2 R002-0254

Form Assembly Option 2: Two-Way Panel & Three-Way Panel

Top Door Insert, 41" Retaining H C 1 R002-A068

Side Door Insert, 41" Retaining H.C. 2 R002-A073

Groover Former, 41" Retaining H C 1 R002-A074

R002-A081

R002-A105

STANDARD PARTS LIST

DESCRIPTION QTY PART NUMBER

PC - MOUNTING PLATE - TOP PANEL 1

Bottom Door Insert, 41" Retaining H.C. 1

LOOP HOLDER #5 NO-RECESS HOLDER 1

5 FLAT WASHER 26 5-FW .5-13 HEX NUT 28 .5-13-HN 5-13 x 1 5 CARRIAGE BOLT 6 5-13x1 5-CB .5-13 x 1.5 HEX BOLT 2 .5-13x1.5-HB

R002-0130 10" 3-WAY KNOB FORMER; HOLLOW CORE 2

R002-0254

R002-A068

R002-A073

R002-A074

Top Door Insert, 41" Retaining H.C. 1

Side Door Insert, 41" Retaining H C 2

Groover Former, 41" Retaining H.C. 1

Bottom Door Insert, 41" Retaining H C 1

R002-A081 LOOP HOLDER #5 NO-RECESS HOLDER 1

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL1)

R002-0245 A/R Drill Template #1, Top Door

R002-0247 A/R Drill Template #2, Side Doors

R002-0303 A/R Drill Template #3, Bottom Door

5-13x1 5-HB

R002-A105 5 FLAT WASHER 26 .5-FW 5-13 HEX NUT 28 5-13-HN .5-13 x 1.5 CARRIAGE BOLT 6 .5-13x1.5-CB 5-13 x 2

COMPATIBLE PART NUMBER QTY

R002-0245 A/R Drill Te

Top Door Insert, 41" Retaining H.C. Side Door Insert, 41" Retaining H.C. Groover Former, 41" Retaining H C Bottom Door Insert, 41" Retaining H C LOOP HOLDER #5 NO-RECESS HOLDER

R002-0247 A/R Drill Te R002-0303 A/R Drill Te options must be selected seperately and are not included in this assembly. nfigurable on 9" Set-back & 3-Way type retaining forms only

REVISION HISTORY

AND

R002-A081
R002-0254
R002-A074

1.

Remove all applicable internal components from existing form as specified below.

• Knob castings

• Groove former

• Fork slots

• Hook/loop holder

• Bolted PC inserts

2.

• All carriage and plug bolts

• All letter knob cover plates

• Any other options (i.e. 60 in (1520 mm) extension, half block insert, top block insert, etc.)

For forms currently equipped with PC plate only: Verify existing welded PC plate placement is correct by placing template #1 (R002-0245) on top door panel as shown.

• If PC plate mates to template, proceed to step 4.

• If PC plate mate does not match to template, remove plate with grinder. Make sure finished surface is smooth and flat.

3.

Clamp template #1 (R002-0245) to top door panel, insert supplied PC plate as shown and tack weld plate to door.

Critical Note: Template must be centered on panel. Actual panel(s) width may vary ± 1/32 in (0.8 mm) against template, adjust centering placement accordingly.

Helpful Hint: Face mold does not have to be removed from the form; however, removal is recommended to avoid damaging mold during form modification.

4.

Using center punch, mark six hole center locations given per template #1.

Hollow-Core
Block
Standard Form

Remove template #1 from the top panel. If using the twoway panel, reinstall existing D knob covers over the 9-in (230-mm) setback position. If using the three-way panel, reinstall existing B and C knob covers.

Using MAG drill with 5/8-in (16-mm) drill bit, drill all applicable holes through top door panel. Deburr all drilled holes as needed.

Helpful Hint: When using the three-way panel, holes will also go through the B knob covers.

Fully weld PC plate (R002-0130) to top door as per locations indicated in red. 7.

Verify loop holder installed to top door insert (R002-A068). If the holder was not previously installed, secure to top insert.

Critical Note: Do not overtighten.

Place supplied top insert (R002-A068) with loop holder into door as shown. Do not secure insert to door at this step.

Install the 10 in 3-way Knob Former (R002-0254).

Critical Note: Install knobs properly as shown to prevent die-lock condition.

After the knobs are installed, secure the top insert to the top panel.

Hollow-Core
Block

12.

Reinstall all existing carriage (plug) bolts to top panel except for holes indicated in picture.

If the bottom panel on the form contains two angle structures, remove them with a grinder as shown. Make sure the finished surface is smooth and flat. If the panel doesn’t contain the angle structures, proceed to the next step. 13.

14.

Clamp template #3 (R002-0303) to the bottom panel.

Critical Note: Template must be centered on door panel. Actual door(s) width may vary ± 1/32 in (0.8 mm) against template, adjust centering placement accordingly.

Using center punch, mark six hole center locations given per template #3, then remove it from the bottom panel.

Using MAG drill with 5/8-in (16-mm) drill bit, drill all applicable holes through the bottom panel. Deburr all drilled holes as needed.

Place supplied groove former (R002-A074) into bottom door panel, then secure. 17.

Critical Note: Groove former assembly orientation in panel is critical. Incorrect assembly will not allow the form to fully close.

18.

Place supplied bottom door insert (R002-A081) into bottom door panel, then secure.

19.

Clamp template #2 (R002-0247) to a side panel.

Critical Note: Template must be centered on door panel. Actual door(s) width may vary ± 1/32 in (0.8 mm) against template, adjust centering placement accordingly.

Using center punch, mark six hole center locations given per template #2, then remove it from the door panel. 20.

Using MAG drill with 5/8-in (16-mm) drill bit, drill all applicable holes through the bottom panel. Deburr all drilled holes as needed.

Hollow-Core
Block

22.

Place supplied side door insert (R002-A073) into side door panel and secure.

23.

Repeat steps 19 - 22 on other side panel.

Production Notes

Pour

1.

Ensure proper placement of lift hooks. See drawings.

Protruding Style: 1x Rear Lift Loop required

Exposed Height: 2.5 in (64 mm)

Continued

Recessed Style: 2x Rear Lift Loops Required

Demolding 1.

Edge Distance: 4 in (102 mm) (2 places)

With the hollow-core block, make sure the concrete has cured sufficiently before demolding to avoid cracked blocks and broken knobs.

Maintenance, Tips & Tricks

Tips

1.

To ensure the form will perform as expected after the 41 in (1030 mm) Hollow-Core Insert is installed, fully close the binder clamps and inspect the interior seal surfaces between the top and bottom door panels and side inserts. The maximum allowable gap is 1/16 in (1.6 mm).

Helpful Hint: If a feeler gage is not available, a standard washer for 3/8 in (9.5 mm) fastener applications is approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm) thick and can be used to reference gap size.

Hollow-Core
Block

To ensure the form is within tolerance after the 41 in (1030 mm) Hollow-Core Insert is installed, fully close the binder clamps and using a measuring tape, measure the form width at three locations as shown. Each actual measure must be between 17 27/32 in - 18 1/32 in (453 mm - 458 mm). 2.

If the form will not fully close after the 41 in (1030 mm) Hollow-Core Insert is installed, make sure the carriage/ plug bolts are not interfering with the side inserts and groove former.

A gap up to 1/8 in (3.2 mm) is allowable between the top and bottom hollow-core inserts when the form is fully closed. This design-intended gap assists in maintaining proper block height.

Some removal of primer occurring during cycling of the forms is to be expected. The primer is intended to provide corrosion protection until initial use only. Consistent application of release agent and proper storage is recommended to provide continuous protection.

XL RETAINING FORMS

XL Retaining Forms

52 in (1320 mm) XL

72 in (1830 mm) XL

96 in (2440 mm) XL

Overview

R001-0202

R001-0386

R001-0554

R001-A029

R001-A030

R001-A031

R001-A047

R001-A048

R001-A137

PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION QTY

REDI-ROCK NAMEPLATE 2

10" XL KNOB FORMER 2

PUSH PAD 8

EJECTOR PLATE 1 2

The Redi-Rock XL form is comprised of a base frame with wheeled, modular doors to create the upper and lower face of the blocks. Each door rolls along the floor between open and closed form positions, while mating to the stationary base frame. This form design provides safe and predictable motion during operation.

R001-A138

R001-A149

R001-A150

The Redi-Rock XL form is used to manufacture R-5236HC, R-7236HC, and R-9636HC.

PARTS LIST

DESCRIPTION QTY PART NUMBER

R001-0202 10" XL KNOB FORMER 2 R001-0386 PUSH PAD 8 R001-0554

REDI-ROCK NAMEPLATE 2

EJECTOR PLATE 1 2 R001-A029

EJECTOR PLATE 2 2 R001-A030

R001-A031

R001-A047

R001-A048

R001-A137

R001-A138

EJECTOR PLATE 3 4

52" DOOR SEAL 1 1

52" DOOR SEAL 2 1

52" BOTTOM DOOR WELDMENT 1

52" TOP DOOR WELDMENT 1

R001-A151

R001-A152

R001-A157

R001-A160

R001-A169

R001-A158

R001-A162

STD-0034

STD-0035

STD-0103

5-13-HN

EJECTOR PLATE 2 2

EJECTOR PLATE 3 4

52" DOOR SEAL 1 1

52" DOOR SEAL 2 1

52" BOTTOM DOOR WELDMENT 1

52" TOP DOOR WELDMENT 1

52" TOP DOOR INSERT 1

BOTTOM DOOR INSERT 1

GROOVE FORMER 1

52IN CAP 2

FACE MOLD CRADLE 1

DOOR SUPPORT CARRIAGE 2

EJECTOR SCREW WELDMENT 8

LEFT FLAP SEAL WELDMENT 2

RIGHT FLAP SEAL WELDMENT 2

6" V-GROOVE WHEEL 8

6" METAL WHEEL 4

ALLOY STEEL SHOULDER SCREW 8

5-13 HEX NUT 42

5-13x1 5-HB .5-13 x 2 HEX BOLT 8 .5-13x2-HB

5-13 x 1 5 HEX BOLT 36

5-13 x 4 HEX BOLT 12 5-13x4-HB 5 FLAT WASHER 86 5-FW

R001-A149 BOTTOM DOOR INSERT 1

52" TOP DOOR INSERT 1

75-4 5 HEX NUT 18 75-4 5-HN

R001-A151

R001-A150 GROOVE FORMER 1

52IN CAP 2

R001-A152 FACE MOLD CRADLE 1

R001-A157 DOOR SUPPORT CARRIAGE 2

75-4 5 x 2 HEX BOLT 18 75-4 5x2-HB 3/8" HEX NUT 8 375-16-HN FLAT WASHER 8 .375-FW ALUMINUM BLIND RIVET 1/8" x

8

R001-A160

R001-A169 LEFT FLAP SEAL WELDMENT 2

EJECTOR SCREW WELDMENT 8

R001-A158 RIGHT FLAP SEAL WELDMENT 2

R001-A162

STD-0034 6" METAL WHEEL 4

6" V-GROOVE WHEEL 8

STD-0035 ALLOY STEEL SHOULDER SCREW 8 STD-0103

5-13-HN

5-13x1 5-HB

5-13x2-HB

5-13 HEX NUT 42

5-13 x 1 5 HEX BOLT 36

5-13 x 2 HEX BOLT 8

5-13x4-HB 5 FLAT WASHER 86 5-FW

75-4 5-HN

5-13 x 4 HEX BOLT 12

75-4 5 HEX NUT 18

.75-4.5x2-HB 3/8" HEX NUT 8 375-16-HN FLAT WASHER 8 375-FW

.75-4.5 x 2 HEX BOLT 18

NOTES: 1) MUST CONFORM TO INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS PER QIS-R001-A000

REPLACED POLY SEAL FLAPS (R001-A007/A008) WITH STEEL (R001-A158/A162) 26JAN2023 L

R001-A031

Minimum Requirements

On the following pages, you will find the minimum requirements for use of the Redi-Rock XL form in regard to:

• Facility size

• Floor flatness

• Foundation strength

• Block reinforcement

• Release agents

• Lifting hooks

The Redi-Rock XL form open and closed envelope is shown below. Given precast operations vary, additional clearance for operator accessibility, pour method, block removal method, etc. are up to the individual manufacturer.

in.

in. (2,110 mm) 108 in. (2,720 mm)

mm) 64 in. (1,600 mm)

Flatness

in. (3,325 mm)

Since the base frame and doors each directly contact the manufacturing facility floor, a maximum flatness tolerance of ± 1/4 in (7 mm) is necessary for entire form contact area (130 x 66 in; 3,300 x 1,675 mm) to ensure proper and safe operation of the Redi-Rock XL form.

A fully equipped form filled with concrete and operator have a total maximum weight of 12,000 lbs (5,444 kg). Ensure floor foundation has adequate strength for the load. Facility Size

Figure 1
Figure 2
66 in. (1,560 mm)

Reinforcement

All Redi-Rock XL Hollow-Core Retaining blocks, including R-5236HC, R-7236HC, and R-9636HC, require steel reinforcement cages per Redi-Rock specification. This is a safety critical requirement to protect against crack propagation transferring through thin-walled sections of the precast modular blocks (PMBs).

See page xxi in the Appendix for steel reinforcement specifications.

Release Agent

Be sure to use a release agent that is approved by Redi-Rock International. Call 866-222-8400 for further details.

Lifting Hooks

All Redi-Rock XL blocks must be produced with specified lift hooks. Redi-Rock International has completed verification testing to ensure the lift hooks meet safe working load requirements with an adequate factor of safety. See below for the two approved options, and see page 148 for lift hook placement.

Manufactured by: American Step Company americanstep.com

Item Number: 500-975"

Description: Solid Loop Lifter, Ø1/2" X 9 3/4", A36 Steel, Epoxy coated per ASTM A 934

Note: The Redi-Rock Licensed Manufacturer is responsible for safe lifting and handling of all concrete products created in Redi-Rock forms. The use of lifting devices and associated hardware shall be in accordance with the printed safe lifting practices and procedures, as published by the manufacturer.

Manufactured by: A.L. Patterson

Website: alpsupply.com

Item Number: LRA7169G

Description: R-Anchor, Ø 7/16" X 9", Hot Dip Galvanized

1/2" Solid Loop Lifter
7/16" R Anchor

Safety

Each manufacturer is responsible for addressing their own site-specific safety plan when using the Redi-Rock XL form, following all state and federal laws and regulations.

When updating your safety plan in regard to using the XL form, please be sure to take into account these safety factors:

• Depending on the form configuration, the operator will be performing tasks at a height of up to 10 feet (3 meters), and a safe working platform is needed.

• Make sure to have proper accessibility clearance beyond the full open form envelope.

• Keep working area clean to reduce debris around the form which could hinder the smooth opening and closing of the sliding form doors.

• Do NOT climb on the form.

• Be aware of slippery surfaces created by the release agents used on the form.

• Always wear proper personal protection equipment (safety glasses, steel toed shoes, hearing protection, etc.) when using the XL form.

• Operator should use caution when opening and closing the binder clamps.

• Operator should be aware of potential energy being applied during demolding, especially when applying torque to ejector screws.

• Be sure XL blocks reach a compressive strength of 1,500 psi (7 mPa) before demolding and moving the block.

• Use rigging and lifting devices of adequate strength for the lifting loads (see page xix in the Appendix for load multiplier chart)

Product Data Sheets

For product data sheets, see these pages in the Appendix: 52 in (1320 mm) XL Hollow-Core Retaining blocks .......................... page xlix 72 in (1830 mm) XL Hollow-Core Retaining blocks page li 96 in (2440 mm) XL Hollow-Core Retaining blocks .......................... page liii

General Production

Note: There are instructions specific to producing each Redi-Rock precast modular block throughout this manual. Please be sure to understand both the following general guidelines and the specific instructions before beginning to manufacture a Redi-Rock product.

Prep

1.

If not cleaned after last demolding, clean all surfaces of the form.

(See cleaning notes on page 152 for reference.) Retract all ejector screws to the fully retracted position.

2.

With the doors fully open, spray a thin film of release agent on all the internal surfaces, take special care to get:

A. Underside of the hollowcore Inserts closest to the face mold

B. Around and inside the lift hook slot

C. Underside of knob formers

D. Spray the face mold with release agent

Critical Note: Confirm all ejector screws are in the fully retracted/pour position.

Helpful Hint: When applying release agent, make sure the doors are in the fully open position, and allow sufficient time for release agent to drip before closing the doors. Excessive release agent pooling in the face mold will adversely affect the block surface.

Apply shake-on color to the face mold if desired.

Insert the specified lift hook into the lift hook embed.

Note: See page x in the Appendix for lift hook specifications. Non-specified or smaller hooks may fall out of the hook embed while pouring and are not adequately rated for lifting conditions.

Add cross-tubes on top of the form.

Position and tie the reinforcement cage to the cross-tubes.

Critical Note: All Redi-Rock XL Hollow-Core Retaining blocks, including R-5236HC, R-7236HC, and R-9636HC, require steel reinforcement cages per Redi-Rock specification. This is a safety critical requirement to protect against crack propagation transferring through thin-walled sections of the precast modular blocks (PMBs). See page xxi in the Appendix for steel reinforcement specifications.

Close the doors and tightly secure all binder clamps (starting with lower clamps).

Helpful Hint: Binder clamps may need to be adjusted to ensure proper form closure.

8.

Remove cross-tubes, make sure cage is centered/positioned properly.

Note: This section should be used for general guidance only, as sitespecific factors such as mix characteristics, vibration methods, operator experience, etc. determine pouring method. It is recommended that manufacturers follow ASTM C 1776 Standard Specification for WetCast Precast Modular Retaining Wall Units.

Internal Vibration Method: Pour

Begin placing concrete via the top of the form opening, targeting the hollow-core insert so that the concrete does not drop the full height of the form. While placing concrete, ensure that the rebar cage does not shift position.

At appropriate intervals, pause pouring to internally vibrate concrete as needed.

Note: Be careful to not get vibrator stuck between the rebar cage and form.

Fill form to desired block size.

Screed rear block surface. Add two lift hooks positioned as shown in drawing below. Edge distance and exposed height applies to all three block sizes.

Note: Improper lift hook placement reduces the lifting capacity/ safe working load.

Edge Distance: 6 in. (152.4 mm)

Exposed Height: 3 in. (76.2 mm)

External Vibration Method: All XL forms are standard configured with wedge vibration brackets. The two locations are shown.

With bottom door vibrator activated, begin pouring concrete via top of form opening. Target the hollow-core insert so that the concrete does not drop the full height of the form. While placing concrete, ensure that the rebar cage does not shift position.

Activate upper door vibrator as form is filled.

Deactivate vibrators once the form is filled to desired block size.

Screed rear block surface. Add two lift hooks positioned as shown in drawing on the previous page. Edge distance and exposed height applies to all three block sizes.

Note: Improper lift hook placement reduces the lifting capacity/safe working load

Demolding

Redi-Rock XL bocks must meet a minimum compressive strength of 1,500 psi (7 mPa) before demolding.

1.

Once the concrete has cured, release all binder clamps on both sides starting with lower clamps.

2.

Tighten all ejector screws on each door with an impact driver or wrench. Apply torque in a criss-cross pattern (upper right, lower left, upper left, lower right) until door releases.

3.

Apply drive torque to the two lower ejector screws on each door until screw travel limit is reached (each door will be partially open). Alternate the left and right ejector screws equally during the process.

Helpful Hint: Binder clamps may need to be adjusted to ensure proper form closure.

Critical Note: After the door releases from the block, DO NOT torque the upper two ejector screws on each door. Doing so will create binding between form and block, which may damage the block and form components.

4.

Push doors to fully open position, then retract all ejector screws to pouring position (hand tight).

Remove block with preferred method.

Option 1: Secure lift device to two rear lift hooks and remove block from form.

Option 2: Secure forklift to lower block recess geometry and remove block from form.

Rotate block 90 degrees to standard orientation via preferred method (coffing hoist, upender, etc).

Scrape residual concrete from steel and rubber parts after each demolding operation.

Pay close attention to:

A. Near all hollow-core inserts

B. Underside of the carriage doors -- this is critical for maintaining proper form sealing

C. Face mold

D. Behind ejector pad before retracting screw

E. Base frame tracks

F. All door seals

G. Near all face mold flaps

Use compressed air or a vacuum to remove all concrete debris.

In addition to your own site-specific safety plan, when storing RediRock XL blocks maintain the following standards:

• Maximum stacking height of three blocks

• Ensure the storage surface is level, compacted, and allows drainage

• Maintain a safe clearance distance around stacked XL blocks

Tips & Tricks

Flap Seals: Each door has a right and a left tapered flap seal. Make sure to select the correct part for replacement.

Top Door Left Flap
Top Door Right Flap
Bottom Door Right Flap
Bottom Door Left Flap

Remove two 3/8-inch-16 thread nuts from the seal assembly clamped between the door and the carriage.

On interior of carriage, remove face mold flap seal.

2. 1. 3.

Replace old seal with new seal in same slots (tapered surface toward the center of the block).

Critical Note: Make sure rear side of seal contacts carriage flange. If a gap between flap end and carriage flange exists, edges of PMB may break during demolding.

4.

Fully secure two 3/8-inch-16 thread nuts on the flap studs.

Ejector Screw and Plate Assembly:

Shoulder bolts, ejector screws and pads are common throughout the form; however, there are three different plate assemblies. The step-by-step instructions show replacement of one ejector screw and plate assembly, and the method is similar for the other two assemblies.

Note: Mating shoulder bolt (McMaster 91259A903 or equivalent), ejector screw (R001-A169), and plate assembly (R001-A029, R001-A030 or R001-A031) must be replaced simultaneously.

NOTE: PUSH PADS AND SHOULDER BOLTS INSTALLED FROM INTERIOR SIDE OF F

R001-A029
STD-0103
R001-0554
R001-A169
R001-A030

Unfasten shoulder bolt from the ejector pad. Set aside pad.

Remove ejector screw.

Remove all fasteners securing the plate assembly to the form.

Secure new plate assembly to form by hand tightening fasteners.

Install new ejector screw.

Reinstall the ejector pad and secure with new shoulder bolt.

7.

Unfasten shoulder bolt from the ejector pad. Set aside pad.

Helpful Hint: If the Ejector Pad is not seated flush, shift plate vertically and/or horizontally as needed to achieve alignment.

8.

Fully tighten plate assembly with fasteners.

Door Seals: There are six different door seals for the XL forms -- two for each door segment geometry. Make sure you have the proper seal for each door segment. Geometry should match the door segment and the magnets should directly contact the doors with alignment pins.

R001-A068

R001-A070

R001-A048

R001-A067
R001-A069
R001-A047

Remove polyurethane seals from the alignment pins on the frame door segment(s).

Clean all concrete residue from the frame surface.

Align holes on new polyurethane seals with corresponding alignment pins then press into place until magnets secure the seal to the metal frame.

Casters: There are eight, 6-inch (150-millimeter) diameter casters per XL Form. Four v-channel casters are nearest the center of the form and ride on the frame track, while four standard casters are on the outside of the carriage and ride on the floor. The following instructions show replacement of casters on one side of the form.

& NUT INSTALLED ON TOP OF 52" DOOR FLANGE

WASHERS & NUT INSTALLED ON TOP OF 52" DOOR FLANGE

NOTE: WHEELS INSTALLED WITH GREASE FITTING TOWARDS OUTSIDE OF FORM

PROJECT:

TITLE: 52IN XL RETAINING FORM

2X CARRIAGES ASSEMBLED IDENTICALLY

Remove two backstop nuts/bolts/washers from frame slots. Check for excessive wear on the bolt (replace as needed), set aside.

Slide carriage door assembly completely off frame.

Use properly rated lifting device and equipment to elevate carriage door assembly. Place on stable stand with 6-inch (150-millimeter) minimum clearance beneath the carriage.

Note: Lifting device, equipment, and stands must have a safe working load limit of 2,500 pounds (1,135 kilograms) minimum.

Remove one nut/bolt/washer from caster axle. Check for excessive wear on the bolt (replace as needed), set aside.

Slot new caster in place.

Note: Ensure v-channel casters are used on the front of the carriage and standard casters on the rear of the carriage. 4. 3. 5.

Insert and secure nut/bolt/washer in axle of caster.

Use lifting device to remove carriage from stands and place back on frame.

Reinstall two backstop nuts/bolts/washers on frame slots

In the rear hollow insert of the top door, remove two nuts and washers. Lift Hook Holder

Remove rubber lift hook holder from bolts.

2. 1. 3.

Replace rubber lift hook holder, making sure to align hook slot properly, and reattach with two nuts/washers. Do not overtighten nuts, doing so will deform and damage lift holder.

How to Change the Face Mold Texture: All bolts, nuts, and washers are 1/2-in (13-mm) diameter (13 threads per inch) unless otherwise specified.

With doors fully open, remove four hex bolts and washers securing the outer corners of the face mold to the base frame.

Critical Note: Do NOT remove bolts securing face mold to fork tab weldment.

Use the fork tabs to lift the face mold from the base frame.

1.
2.

3.

4.

Do not stack face molds directly on top of each other. Maintaining a gap between the face molds in storage is critical for mold longevity. Select desired face mold and secure the face mold to the base frame with the four hex bolts and washers at the outer corners.

Tips & Tricks

Critical Note: Battered face molds have one alignment bolt on the underside of the mold. Check for proper orientation to align with mating hole of base frame. If the placement orientation is incorrect, the face mold will not seat within the base frame.

Flashing: Flashing is typically located at the parting line between the face mold and mating steel carriage of the Redi-Rock XL form. Flashing thickness should be limited to approximately 1/16 in (1.5 mm) thick and MUST be removed during demolding. Failure to remove specific flashing from Redi-Rock XL blocks can locally increase the PMB’s height out of tolerance. If face mold flashing greater than 1/8 in (3 mm) thick is observed, this is likely due to non-flat production space (see page 142) or inadequate cleaning (see page 152).

Critical Height: All configurations of the Redi-Rock XL form are manufactured to maintain a PMB height of 36 in (914 mm) ± 1/16 in (1.5 mm). Form tolerance requirements are much more stringent than PMB requirements per ASTM C1776. It is important to target more stringent tolerances and apply form and PMB verification measurements to your production specific quality procedures.

Critical Note: Many vertical surfaces of XL blocks are drafted. Use a straight edge, square, or similar aid to measure block height properly; directly contacting drafted surfaces of the PMB with a tape measure will give an incorrect (artificially increased) height.

Texture Face Damage: The thinnest sections of the XL blocks are located at the corners of the textured face. If minor corner chipping is observed during demolding, refer to the following checks:

Flap Seal Gap: Confirm the rear side of the flap seal contacts carriage flange. If a gap is present, reposition the flap seal to eliminate the gap (see page 153).

Demold Sequence: Applying drive torque to the upper two ejector screws after the PMB has released from the door segment(s) may cause the door to tilt off the base frame, causing door segment to pinch against the XL block. Confirm the demolding procedure is followed properly (see page 150).

Carriage Caster: Confirm all casters are undamaged. Cracked or broken caster(s) will reduce the carriage height, allowing carriage (and mating doors) to bind against the PMB during door opening (see page 159).

Cleaning: Residual concrete build up located on the underside of the carriage door(s) may cause polyurethane face mold to locally deform (during form closure). This condition creates negative draft, which results in demolding shear condition between the form and block. Follow cleaning procedure (see page 152).

52 in (1320 mm)

XL Block

52 in (1320 mm) XL Hollow-Core blocks are used in

RETAINING BLOCKS

Block Library

R-5236HC 52" (1320 mm) XL HOLLOW-CORE Face

R-5236HC 52" (1320 mm) XL Hollow-Core

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Infill Volume:

R-7236HC 72" (1830 mm) XL Hollow-Core

R-9636HC 96" (2440 mm) XL Hollow-Core

• R001-A051 (FORM)

R001-A008

R001-A029

R001-A030

R001-A031

R001-A047

LEFT FLAP ASSEMBLY 2

EJECTOR PLATE 1 2

EJECTOR PLATE 2 2

EJECTOR PLATE 3 4

52" DOOR SEAL 1 1

PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

R001-A048

R001-A137

R001-A138

R001-A149

NOTE: A 36 IN TALL RETAINING FACE MOLD IS NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

PART NUMBER

R001-0202

PARTS LIST

DESCRIPTION QTY

REDI-ROCK NAMEPLATE 2

R001-A150

R001-A151

R001-A152

R001-A157

R001-A160

52" DOOR SEAL 2 1

52" BOTTOM DOOR WELDMENT 1

52" TOP DOOR WELDMENT 1

52" TOP DOOR INSERT 1

BOTTOM DOOR INSERT 1

GROOVE FORMER 1

52IN CAP 2

FACE MOLD CRADLE 1

DOOR SUPPORT CARRIAGE 2

R001-0386 PUSH PAD 8

10" XL KNOB FORMER 2

R001-0554

R001-A007

R001-A008

R001-A029

R001-A030

R001-A031

R001-A047

R001-A048

R001-A137

R001-A138

R001-A149

R001-A150

R001-A151

R001-A152

R001-A157

R001-A160

R001-A169 STD-0034

5-13-HN

5-13x1 5-HB

.5-13x2-HB 5-13x4-HB

.5-FW

75-4 5-HN

75-4 5x2-HB

.375-16-HN

375-FW

125x 375- 500-B

RIGHT FLAP ASSEMBLY 2

LEFT FLAP ASSEMBLY 2

EJECTOR PLATE 1 2

EJECTOR PLATE 2 2

EJECTOR PLATE 3 4

52" DOOR SEAL 1 1

52" DOOR SEAL 2 1

52" BOTTOM DOOR WELDMENT 1

52" TOP DOOR WELDMENT 1

52" TOP DOOR INSERT 1

BOTTOM DOOR INSERT 1

GROOVE FORMER 1

52IN CAP 2

FACE MOLD CRADLE 1

DOOR SUPPORT CARRIAGE 2

EJECTOR SCREW WELDMENT 8

R001-A169

STD-0034

STD-0035

STD-0103

.5-13-HN

EJECTOR SCREW WELDMENT 8

6" V-GROOVE WHEEL 8

6" METAL WHEEL 4

ALLOY STEEL SHOULDER SCREW 8

.5-13 HEX NUT 42

5-13x1 5-HB 5-13 x 2 HEX BOLT 8 5-13x2-HB .5-13 x 4 HEX BOLT 12 .5-13x4-HB

5-13 x 1 5 HEX BOLT 36

5 FLAT WASHER 86 5-FW

75-4 5-HN

75-4 5 HEX NUT 18

.75-4.5 x 2 HEX BOLT 18

.75-4.5x2-HB 3/8" HEX NUT 8 375-16-HN FLAT WASHER 8 375-FW ALUMINUM BLIND RIVET 1/8"

NOTES:

R001-0114 1-A049 -0039 22FEB2022 C

**CRITICAL LENGTH** NOTE: MAGNETS FACE TOP DOOR

PROJECT:

PROJECT:

Form Assembly

Redi-Rock XL forms will be delivered in two pieces if the full 96-in (2440-mm) form is ordered. The 52-in (1320-mm) form is ready to be placed in your facility for production upon delivery.

Helpful Hint: The 72-in (1830-mm) and 96-in (2440mm) door extensions will be bolted together. If you would like to convert the form to produce these size blocks, see following sections.

See page xxiii in the Appendix for 52-in (1320-mm) rebar reinforcement cage specifications.

Safety Note:

Proper rebar reinforcement cages are a safety critical requirement to protect against crack propagation transferring through the thin-walled sections of the precast modular block.

XL Block

72 in (1830 mm)

XL Block

72 in (1830 mm) XL Hollow-Core blocks are used in various retaining wall applications.

R-7236HC 72" (1820

Face

mm) XL HOLLOW-CORE

R-7236HC 72" (1830 mm) XL Hollow-Core

• R001-A051 (FORM)

• R001-A052 (72 IN EXTENSION)

PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION QTY PART NUMBER

R001-A069

R001-A070

R001-A143

NOTE: A 36 IN TALL RETAINING FACE MOLD IS NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE. PARTS LIST

R001-A144

R001-A153

72" DOOR SEAL 1 1

6 FT DOOR SEAL 2 1

72" TOP DOOR WELDMENT 1

72" BOTTOM DOOR WELDMENT 1

72" INSERT 2

72" CAP WELDMENT 2 R001-A156 5-13 HEX NUT 18 5-13-HN

5 FLAT WASHER 18 5-FW

75-4 5-HN

BOTTOM DOOR WELDMENT 1

INSERT 2

CAP WELDMENT 2

75-4 5 HEX NUT 14

75-4 5x2-HB 8 .75-FW

75-4 5 x 2 HEX BOLT 14

NOTE: GRAY COMPONENTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY

REVISION HISTORY

ZONE REV DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED B FULLY REVISED 11JUN2021 C NADOLSKY

1. Form Assembly

With the form fully open, remove two nuts and washers on the rear of the top door, and one nut/ washer in the rear hollow insert, then remove 52in (1320-mm) cap from inside of the form. Repeat with bottom door.

Remove two nuts/washers from each ejector screw plate assembly on top and bottom doors.

Beginning with bottom door, use a crane to align the 72-in (1830-mm) door segment over the 52-in (1320-mm) door flange.

Remove two nuts/washers from each ejector screw plate assembly on top and bottom doors.

5.

Lower the door segment while seating the flange pins.

Helpful Hint: Use a guide bar to align door segments if needed as shown. If studs still do not align properly, loosen upper two nuts/ washers from hollow insert. Do not remove nuts/washers.

Secure door segment with seven 3/4-in (19-mm) nuts and bolts on the bottom door flange.

Repeat steps 4-6 with the top door.

Reassemble four ejector screw plate assemblies with two nuts/ washers per plate.

Install two nuts/washers to the studs at the rear of each door.

Add 72-in (1830-mm) caps (R001-A037) on both top and bottom door. Install four nuts/washers on the rear of each door and one nut washer in the rear hollow insert for each door.

Shut form doors slowly and secure all binder clamps starting with the lowest.

Helpful Hint: Binder clamps may need to be adjusted to ensure proper form closure.

Helpful Hint: If the alignment pins at the door seals don’t mate properly follow these steps:

• Loosen but do not remove the eight (four on the cap, four on the hollow core insert) nuts and washers from the rear of each door

• Shut the door slowly so the hollow-core inserts can self align.

• Fully close the door and secure binder clamps.

• Re-tighten the eight nuts and washers on the rear of each door.

See page xxv in the Appendix for 72-in (1830-mm) rebar reinforcement cage specifications.

Safety Note:

Proper rebar reinforcement cages are a safety critical requirement to protect against crack propagation transferring through the thin-walled sections of the precast modular block.

96 in (2440 mm)

XL Block

96 in (2440 mm) XL Hollow-Core blocks are used in various retaining wall applications.

R-9636HC 96" (2440 mm) XL HOLLOW-CORE

Face Texture:

Ledgestone

Block Weight: 4840 lb (2190 kg)

Block Volume: 33.83 ft³ (0.958 m³)

Center of Gravity: 55.3" (1405 mm)

R-9636HC 96" (2440 mm) XL Hollow-Core

Face Texture:

Block Weight:

Block Volume:

Infill Volume:

Center of Gravity:

ft³ (1.547 m³)

Ledgestone

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

3. Center of Gravity is measured from the back of block, excluding stone infill.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291kg/m3).

6. Interface Shear knobs are nominally 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102 mm) tall.

• R001-A051 (FORM)

• R001-A052 (72 IN EXTENSION)

• R001-A053 (96 IN EXTENSION)

PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

R001-A067

R001-A068

NOTE: A 36 IN TALL RETAINING FACE MOLD IS NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

R001-A145

R001-A146

R001-A164

BOTTOM DOOR WELDMENT 1

R001-A146

Note: These steps assume that the 72-in (1830-mm) and 96-in (2440mm) door extensions are pre-assembled. If your door extensions are not already one unit, see page 170 for instructions on transitioning the form from 52 in (1320 mm) to 72 in (1830 mm) and page 181 for instructions on transitioning the form from 72 in (1830 mm) to 96 in (2440 mm).

With the form fully open, remove two nuts and washers on the rear of the top door, and one nut/ washer in the rear hollow insert, then remove 52-in (1320-mm) cap from inside of the form. Repeat with bottom door. 1.

2.

Remove two nuts/washers from each ejector screw plate assembly on top and bottom doors.

Slide the form to almost closed (approx. 2 in (50 mm) from closed). With the door segments on the crane above, align the studs for the hollow-core inserts into the rear of the door.

Lower the door segment while seating the flange pins. Close form fully to engage the pins.

Helpful Hint: Use a guide bar to align door segments if needed as shown. If studs still do not align properly, loosen upper two nuts/ washers from hollow insert. Do not remove nuts/washers.

5.

Secure door segments with seven 3/4-in (19-mm) nuts and bolts on both the top and bottom door flange.

Reassemble four ejector screw plate assemblies with two nuts/ washers per bracket.

Install two nuts/washers to the studs at the rear of each door.

Secure all binder clamps starting with the lowest. 6. 7. 8.

Helpful Hint: Binder clamps may need to be adjusted to ensure proper form closure.

Helpful Hint: If the pin and pocket pads at the door seals don’t mate, follow these steps:

• Loosen but do not remove the eight (four on the cap, four on the hollow core insert) nuts and washers from the rear of each door

• Shut the door slowly so the hollow-core inserts can self align.

• Fully close the door and secure binder clamps.

• Re-tighten the eight nuts and washers on the rear of each door.

Form Assembly Option 2 - 72 in (1830 mm) XL Form to 96 in (2440 mm) XL Form

• R001-A051 (FORM)

• R001-A052 (72 IN EXTENSION)

• R001-A053 (96 IN EXTENSION)

PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

R001-A067

R001-A068

NOTE: A 36 IN TALL RETAINING FACE MOLD IS NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

R001-A146

R001-A164

R001-A146 96" INSERT 2 R001-A164

DOOR 1

HEX NUT 8 .5-13-HN .5 FLAT WASHER 8 5-FW 75-4.5 HEX NUT 14

75-4 5-HN

R001-A067
R001-A068
R001-A146

With the form fully open, remove four nuts/washers on the rear of the top door, and one nut/washer in the rear hollow insert, then remove 72-in (1830-mm) cap from inside of the form. Repeat step 1 with bottom door. 1.

2.

Beginning with bottom door, use a crane to align the 96-in (2440-mm) door segment over the 72-in (1830-mm) door flange.

Align the studs for the hollow-core inserts into the rear of the door.

4.

Lower the door segment while seating the flange pins.

Helpful Hint: Use a guide bar to align door segments if needed as shown. If studs still do not align properly, loosen upper two nuts/ washers from hollow insert. Do not remove nuts/washers.

Secure door segment with seven 3/4-in (19-mm) nuts/bolts on the bottom door flange. 5.

Install two nuts/washers to the studs at the rear of each door.

Repeat Steps 3-6 with the top door. 7.

XL Block

Shut form doors slowly and secure all binder clamps starting with the lowest.

Helpful Hint: Binder clamps may need to be adjusted to ensure proper form closure.

Helpful Hint: If the pin and pocket pads at the door seals don’t mate, follow these steps:

• Loosen but do not remove the eight (four on the cap, four on the hollow core insert) nuts and washers from the rear of each door

• Shut the door slowly so the hollow-core inserts can self align.

• Fully close the door and secure binder clamps.

• Re-tighten the eight nuts and washers on the rear of each door.

Production Notes

See page xxvii in the Appendix for 96-in (2440-mm) rebar reinforcement cage specifications.

Proper rebar reinforcement cages are a safety critical requirement to protect against crack propagation transferring through the thin-walled sections of the precast modular block. Safety Note:

FREESTANDING FORMS

Freestanding Forms

Overview

General Production

Straight Middle Block

Variable Radius Middle Block

Straight Bottom Block

Variable Radius Bottom Block

Straight Top Block

Variable Radius Top Block

Corner Middle Block

90 Degree Corner Block

Corner Bottom Block

Corner Top Block

Half Corner Middle Block

Half Corner Bottom Block

Half Corner Top Block

Straight Garden Top Block

Variable Radius Garden Top Block

Corner Garden Top Block

Half Corner Garden Top Block

Force Protection Middle Block

Force Protection Bottom Block

Force Protection Top Block

Freestanding Hollow-Core Block

Freestanding Half Hollow-Core Block

Freestanding Corner Hollow-Core Block

Freestanding Half Corner Hollow-Core Block

9 in (230 mm) Tall Corner Block

9 in (230 mm) Tall Garden Block

9 in (230 mm) Tall Two-Sided Block

The standard Redi-Rock Freestanding form consists of a base and four hinged door panels – top, bottom and two sides – that close with binder clamps. The form can be configured with various inserts and molds to create numerous precast modular blocks. Changing the face mold in the freestanding form not only allows you to change the texture of the block, but it can also influence the type of block created.

R003-A009 1 BOTTOM PANEL

R003-A062

R003-A013 1 REMOVEABLE RAILING

General Production

Note: There are instructions specific to producing each Redi-Rock precast modular block throughout this manual. Please be sure to understand both the following general guidelines and the specific instructions before beginning to manufacture a Redi-Rock product.

2. 1.

Set each of the forms as level as practical (level is not critical, however).

To create the texture on the blocks, a rubber face mold is bolted into the form. When installing the mold, set it in place without tightening the bolts and close the form. Use a piece of steel over the bottom two bolts and a pry bar against the rail to shift the mold up or down to achieve a measurement of 46 ⅛ in (1172 mm) from the bottom of the form to the bottom of the lip on the mold. Tighten the top two bolts. Double check the measurement and tighten the bottom two bolts. Repeat on the other side of the form.

Helpful Hint: The video “How to Set Freestanding Block Length” on the RediRock producer secure site walks through this process and provides a good visual representation of this step.

Critical Note: The face mold placement plays a critical role in the correct length of freestanding blocks. Check this measurement frequently to make sure the mold has not shifted and that freestanding blocks are being poured within dimensional tolerance.

Critical Note: Many of the face molds are reversible to increase the texture variations; however, the Limestone texture is not reversible. Be sure to install the face mold so that the thicker portion of the rubber is at the top of the form.

3.

Scrape residual concrete from steel and rubber parts after each demolding operation. Concrete build-up will deform rubber molds and impact product quality.

Pay close attention to:

• Surfaces where steel contacts rubber

• The underside of the knob formers – this is critical for proper knob size and maintaining alignment during wall installation

• Around the loop holders before closing forms so debris does not fall onto the face mold.

4.

Apply a thin layer of release agent to the form surfaces. Over-applying release agent will adversely affect the finished product. Excess release agent can pool in the face mold, causing the surface to flake, spall off, or create bug holes.

Pay attention to hard to reach areas:

• Undersides of inserts

• Underside of knob formers

• Around and inside loop holders

For a list of appropriate release agents visit the secure site or call your business consultant.

5.

Place the lifting insert into the loop holder.

Commercially available lifting inserts are offered by a number of manufacturers, and Redi-Rock producers have elected to use a variety of lifting inserts to safely handle Redi-Rock blocks.

Two inserts which are made from galvanized, A36 steel are shown here.

Critical Note: To aid in demolding Freestanding blocks, another recessed lifting insert will need to be placed in the end of the block after pouring.

Helpful Hint: The rubber face mold should be free of debris before pouring blocks. Compressed air can be helpful if used safely.

Helpful Hint: Spraying the exterior surfaces of the forms will aid in cleaning but can also make them slippery.

Helpful Hint: Depending on what lifting insert you choose to utilize, various loop holders are available to hold the insert in place. See page vi in the Appendix for a full breakdown of available options.

Manufactured by: American Step Company

https://www.americanstep.com/ 830 East Broadway PO Box 137 Griffen, GA 30224-0137

Safety Notes: For Step 5

Manufactured by: A.L. Patterson

https://www.alpsupply.com/ (800) 332-7090

300 Ben Fairless Drive Fairless Hills, PA 19030

• The Redi-Rock Licensed Manufacturer is responsible for safe lifting and handling of all concrete products created in Redi-Rock forms. The use of lifting inserts and associated hardware shall be in accordance with the printed safe lifting practices and procedures, as published by the manufacturer.

• The National Precast Concrete Association (NPCA) publishes the NPCA Quality Control Manual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete Plants. The manual provides guidance to help assure production of quality precast products, and includes many recommendations which are applicable to Redi-Rock Manufacturers. The section of this manual which addresses lifting inserts allows the use of smooth bars made of steel conforming to ASTM A36 for lifting inserts and apparatus (Commentary to Section 2.3.1). The manual also recommends that embedded steel shapes which will be exposed to moisture or other corrosive environments be galvanized (Commentary to Section 2.3.2).

• Wire rope lifting loops are not recommended due to accelerated corrosion potential that adversely affects block durability and safety.

• Blocks must be poured with concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. ASTM C94 specifies that mixing water shall be potable water. Do not use admixtures containing chlorides because Redi-Rock blocks contain metal embedments.

• Redi-Rock Manufacturers should obtain testing data which demonstrates the capacity of the lifting inserts exceeds the weight of the blocks with a factor of safety of 4 or greater. The capacity of the inserts should be checked when the blocks are in a green condition when they are stripped from the forms and in subsequent handling and setting conditions. For commercially available inserts, this test data should be available from the lifting insert manufacturer. If commercially available inserts are not used, the Redi-Rock Manufacturer should perform a testing program to demonstrate that the inserts are appropriate, meet all applicable specifications, and have a lifting capacity which will provide a minimum factor of safety of 4 or greater.

6.

When closing the forms, close the side panels first, bottom panel second, and top panel third. Be sure to check the position of the lifting insert as the panel closes. Latch form binders.

1.

Fill forms to the specified depth to produce blocks that conform to published dimensions and tolerances.

2. Pour

Helpful Hint: Depending on your concrete mix, you may need to vibrate concrete during or after pouring to get the desired finished product.

Pour concrete to here

3 4

Finish the end of the block with a trowel, and place a recessed lifting insert to aid with demolding.

Critical Note: If lifting inserts are not fully recessed into the end of the block, they will interfere with block placement in the field.

Full Corner Mold Side View
Half

3.

Coding and dating blocks is easily done by scribing into fresh concrete on the end of the block at this time.

Demolding

Safety Note:

Allow blocks to cure properly before lifting out of form. Proper cure times vary according to weather, concrete mix, and curing conditions. Lifting inserts typically have minimum concrete strength requirements to develop necessary lifting capacity.

1.

To open the form, unlock and unhook the binders.

2.

Use a pry bar to aid in opening the forms. Do not hammer on forms.

Helpful Hint: The appropriate pry point for Freestanding forms will vary depending on what generation form they are. Older forms will have a tab halfway down the side panel to use as a leverage point. Newer forms are designed with a notch towards the top of the panel for the pry bar placement.

Helpful Hint: Do not allow panels to slam open hard on rails. Protecting the form from unnecessary wear and tear will help to prolong the life of your investment.

3.

To carefully lift the blocks out of the form, hook on to the recessed lifting insert on the end of the block. Lift vertically to clear the form before moving, and be careful that blocks do not swing and tear edges of the face mold.

Safety Note:

The concrete blocks are heavy – refer to the specific information from the Block Library to determine requirements for safe lifting of each product. Always use load-rated chains, cables and hooks. A Lifting Load Safety sheet can be found on page xix of the Appendix.

4.

To transition the blocks for storage, gently roll the block from its end to the bottom.

5.

It is recommended to break away concrete flashing at form seams and lift hook. This step makes wall installation easier and safe work for your customer.

Storage

1.

Moving the blocks into inventory can be done with a chain and hook or a lift/clamp.

Safety Note:

The height of the stacks of blocks will be determined by your specific location and safety standards.

Critical Note: Once the block has been lifted, do not attempt to set it back in face mold. Serious damage may occur to the mold.

Helpful Hint: Some manufacturers prefer to inventory freestanding blocks on pallets to make moving them around the yard easier. It is also recommended to stack like blocks together.

Maintenance

Binder Adjustments

Binder tension loosens over time. When the forms are really easy to close or more flashing is appearing on blocks, it’s time to adjust the binders. Tension can be increased by tightening the nuts on the binder. Check regularly, and adjust as required.

Face Mold Position

FORM INSTALLATIO

Rubber/Polyurethane Mold Storage Worn

Redi-Rock molds are sensitive to ultraviolet exposure. Do not store in direct sunlight.

Protect all edges/lips of the mold from warping or deforming during storage.

Hinges

If hinges are worn, consult RediRock for options.

Frequently check the block length measurement for freestanding forms to ensure the face mold position hasn’t shifted for full length blocks. If the measurement is out of tolerance from 46 ⅛ in (1172 mm), loosen the bolts for the face mold, readjust the mold height with a pry bar and steel over the bottom bolts, then tighten. Repeat on both sides.

Helpful Hint: The video “How to Set Freestanding Block Length” on the Redi-Rock producer secure site walks through this process and provides a good visual representation of this step.

BATTER

Straight Middle Block

FREESTANDING BLOCKS

Block Library

Freestanding Straight Middle blocks are textured on two sides and have many uses, such as barriers, parapet walls, seat walls, signs, etc.

F-SM STRAIGHT MIDDLE

Face Texture:

F-SB STRAIGHT BOTTOM

Kingstone / Ledgestone

F-SG STRAIGHT GARDEN

KNOBS @ 23 (584) OC, TYP.

Kingstone / Ledgestone Kingstone / Ledgestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

24

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A071 (FLAT BASE)

• R003-A100 (FILLER PLATE)

• R003-A101 FS GROOVE FORMER 40IN STANDARD OR R003-A102 FS FULL GROOVE FORMER 46IN

• TWO R002-A104 (10IN KNOB FORMERS)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR TOP OF BLOCK AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

NOTE: TWO 18IN FACE MOLDS ARE NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH

Form Assembly

1.

Install the filler plates (R003-A100) in the top and bottom door panels near the base of the form using the existing holes.

ORIENTATION IN FORM

2.

Position the flat base insert (R003-A071) in the bottom of the form, centering it with the filler plates on the top and bottom door panels. Bolt in place.

Helpful Hint: Make sure the center holes in the flat base are aligned toward the top panel of the door. These will be used with variable radius inserts and force protection inserts.

3.

Install the groove former (R003-A047).

4.

Install two 18-in (457-mm) face molds on the side panel doors.

Critical Note: Many of the face molds are reversible to increase the texture variations; however, the Limestone texture is not reversible. Be sure to install the face mold so that the thicker portion of the rubber is toward the top of the block.

Helpful Hint: The video “How to Set Freestanding Block Length” on the RediRock producer secure site walks through this process and provides a good visual representation of this step. Instructions are also found on page 194.

5.

Install the knob formers (R003-A155) and lifting insert if they are not already installed.

Helpful Hint: Depending on what lifting insert you choose to utilize, various loop holders are available to hold the insert in place. See page vi in the Appendix for a full breakdown of available options.

Production Notes

Prep

1.

With the block being poured vertically, make sure to apply release agent on the undersides of surfaces in the face mold to facilitate demolding and prevent unneeded wear and tear on the face mold.

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Demolding

1.

Use a pry bar to aid in opening the forms. Do not hammer on forms.

Helpful Hint: The appropriate pry point for freestanding forms will vary depending on what generation form they are. Older forms will have a tab halfway down the side panel to use as a leverage point. Newer forms are designed with a notch towards the top of the panel for the pry bar placement.

Helpful Hint: Do not allow panels to slam open hard on rails. Protecting the form from unnecessary wear and tear will help to prolong the life of your investment.

Full Corner Mold Side View Side
Half Corner
Full Face Mold Side View

Freestanding

Variable Radius Middle Block

PARTS LIST

FREESTANDING BLOCKS

PART NUMBER

Freestanding Variable Radius Middle blocks are textured on two sides, and the recesses at the end of the blocks make it easier to cut blocks to turn a radius.

Block Library

F-VM STRAIGHT MIDDLE

F-VM VARIABLE RADIUS MIDDLE

Face Texture:

Face Texture:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

RECESS OPTIONAL

OPTIONAL GROOVE EXTENTION

/ Limestone

DESCRIPTION QTY

4"X12" END INSERT FOR TOP OF FORM 1

R003-A052 4"x12" END INSERT FOR BOTTOM OF FORM 1

R003-A087

Kingstone / Ledgestone

F-VG VARIABLE RADIUS GARDEN TOP

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL1)

PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION

/ Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone

/ Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

R002-A108 A/R LOOP HOLDER #1 R002-A155 A/R LIFTEYE FORM #1

12 (305) x 4 (101) END RECESS

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

F-VB VARIABLE RADIUS BOTTOM

Kingstone / Ledgestone

F-VT VARIABLE RADIUS TOP

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Notes: FL1) COMPATIBLE OPTIONS MUST BE SELECTED SEPARATELY AND ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THIS AS 2) GRAY COMPONENTS FOR REFERENCE ONLY

REVISION HISTORY REV ECO NUMBER DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED A NA INITIAL RELEASE 12/09/2021 L RADOY

KNOBS @ 23 (584) OC, TYP.

RECESS OPTIONAL

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

10 (254) DIAMETER x 4 (102) HIGH, TYPICAL. 6 (152) DIAMETER KNOBS AVAILABLE.

RECESS OPTIONAL

LIFTING INSERT OR TEXTURED TOP SURFACE, OPTIONAL

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

OPTIONAL GROOVE EXTENTION

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

Cobble

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A071 (FLAT BASE)

• R003-A100 (FILLER PLATE)

• R003-A087 (BOTTOM VARIABLE RADIUS INSERT)

• R003-A052 (TOP VARIABLE RADIUS INSERT)

• R003-A102 FS FULL GROOVE FORMER 46IN OR R003-A101 FS GROOVE FORMER 40IN STANDARD WITH TWO R003-A050 FS GROOVE FORMER EXTENSIONS

• TWO R002-A104 (10IN KNOB FORMERS)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR TOP OF BLOCK AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

BOTTOM BLOCK

BOTTOM BLOCK

BOTTOM BLOCK

Form Assembly

1.

Install the 46-in (1168-mm) groove former on the bottom panel; OR install the groove former extensions to the standard 40-in (1016-mm) groove former.

2.

Remove the flat base from the form. The 4x12 bottom insert (R003-A087) bolts to the flat base, then reinstall the base and insert in the form, centering with the filler plates.

3.

Helpful Hint: The top variable radius insert is placed on top of the poured concrete in the form, so it is not actually installed prior to pouring the blocks.

Helpful Hint: it is recommended to use a full length groove former with the variable radius inserts. Some manufacturers do choose to pour it with a shorter groove former; however, this creates excess concrete near the groove that a contractor will need to work around in the field.

If the face mold is not already installed, see page 188 for installation instructions, as it is the same as with the straight middle block.

Production Notes

Pour

1.

Pour concrete to the bottom lip of the face mold.

2.

Place the top variable radius insert with lifting hook into the top of the block until the steel bar hits the top edge of the form. Clean up excess concrete.

Demolding

1.

Remove the top insert from the form.

2.

Then, demold the block as usual using the lifting hook in the end of the block.

Maintenance, Tips & Tricks

Tips

1.

Variable Radius Middle blocks are used to create curved freestanding walls. The recesses in the ends of the block make cutting concrete in the field easier. Blocks can be poured with one or two recesses; and curves can be created with one or two saw cuts per joint.

One saw cut per joint.
Two saw cuts per joint for tighter radius curves.

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

Straight Bottom Block

Freestanding Straight Bottom blocks are textured on two sides and are used at the bottom of freestanding walls.

F-SB STRAIGHT BOTTOM

F-SB STRAIGHT BOTTOM F-ST STRAIGHT TOP

Face Texture:

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE 23 (584) ± LIMESTONE FACE TEXTURE VARIES

Block

Face Texture:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

KNOBS @ 23 (584) OC, TYP.

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Face Texture:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

(254)

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

3. Architectural faces on the blocks have varying texture.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

(584) ± LIMESTONE

5. (2291 kg/m3).

BOTTOM

6. 6" (152 mm) diameter vertical semi-clyindrical voids at the ends of the block for mechanical tie-down are available, refer to Force Protection blocks for additional information.

7. Knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102 mm) tall. Smaller knobs are available.

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A071 (FLAT BASE)

• R003-A100 (FILLER PLATE)

• TWO R002-A104 (10IN KNOB FORMERS)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR TOP OF BLOCK AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

Form Assembly

1.

Remove the groove former from the form. Holes in the form can be plugged using bolts.

2.

The remainder of the set up is the same as the Freestanding Straight Middle block. See page 195 for instructions.

Straight Bottom Block

RECESS OPTIONAL

Freestanding

12 (305) x 4 (101) END RECESS

RECESS OPTIONAL

(457)

Variable Radius Bottom Block

OPTIONAL GROOVE EXTENTION

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

OPTIONAL GROOVE EXTENTION

8(1172)

Freestanding Variable Radius Bottom blocks are used at the bottom of freestanding walls with curves.

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

F-VB VARIABLE RADIUS BOTTOM

Face Texture:

Block

KNOBS @ 23 (584) OC, TYP.

RECESS OPTIONAL

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

7 1 2 (190)

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

/ Limestone

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

10 (254) DIAMETER x 4 (102) HIGH, TYPICAL. 6 (152) DIAMETER KNOBS AVAILABLE.

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

3. Variable radius feature can be cast on only one end, coordinate.

OPTIONAL GROOVE EXTENTION

Kingstone / Ledgestone

/ Limestone

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

Kingstone / Ledgestone

RECESS OPTIONAL

LIFTING INSERT OR TEXTURED TOP SURFACE, OPTIONAL

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

4. Architectural faces on the blocks have varying texture. 5. Actual block volumes and weights may vary. 6. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291 kg ). 7. Knobs are typically 10" (254

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A087 (BOTTOM VARIABLE RADIUS INSERT)

• R003-A052 (TOP VARIABLE RADIUS INSERT)

• TWO R002-A104 (10IN KNOB FORMERS)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR TOP OF BLOCK AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

BOTTOM BLOCK

BOTTOM BLOCK

Form Assembly

1.

Remove the groove former and extensions from the form. Holes in the form can be plugged using bolts.

2.

The remainder of the set up is the same as the Variable Radius Middle block. See page 199 for instructions.

Production Notes

Pour 1.

Pour concrete to the bottom lip of the face mold.

2.

Place the top variable radius insert with lifting hook into the top of the block until the steel bar hits the top edge of the form. Clean up excess concrete.

Demolding

1.

Remove the top insert from the form.

2.

Then, demold the block as usual using the lifting hook.

Storage

1.

To stack freestanding bottom blocks in the yard, use a spacer, such as a block of 4-in (100-mm) tall wood, to stack the blocks level.

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Straight Top Block

noted otherwise. manufacturer.

Freestanding Straight Top blocks are textured on two sides and typically used at the top of freestanding walls when a cap will be placed on the wall.

FACE TEXTURE VARIES 24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE COBBLESTONE 23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

F-ST STRAIGHT TOP

Face Texture:

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone Block

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE COBBLESTONE

(584) ± LIMESTONE

5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291 kg/m3). 6. 6" (152 mm) diameter vertical semi-clyindrical voids at the ends of the block for mechanical tie-down are available, refer to Force Protection blocks for additional information.

7. Knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102 mm) tall. Smaller knobs are available.

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A071 (FLAT BASE)

• R003-A100 (FILLER PLATE)

• R003-A101 FS GROOVE FORMER 40IN STANDARD OR R003-A102 FS FULL GROOVE FORMER 46IN

• TWO R002-A095 (KNOB COVERS)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR TOP OF BLOCK AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

R003-A047

Form Assembly

1.

Remove the knob formers and install the knob covers. All other setup is the same as the freestanding straight middle. See page 195 for instructions.

Maintenance, Tips & Tricks

Tips 1.

If a customer won’t be using a cap on top of the wall and desires a texture on top of the block, a textured top panel (R003-A111) exists to create this option. The top panel of the form would be removed, and the textured top panel would be installed. After the door panels have been switched, install the textured top panel rubber (R003-A113) into the door.

(FL2)

R003-A112 A/R TEXTURE TOP POLY INSERT FOR CORNERS R003-A113 A/R TESTURE TOP POLY INSERT STANDARD

GRAY COMPONENTS

Helpful Hint: If blocks with no hook are necessary, a probst lift, clamp or nylon slings will need to be used for storage and placement.

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

OPTIONAL GROOVE EXTENTION RECESS OPTIONAL OPTIONAL GROOVE EXTENTION Kingstone / Ledgestone

Variable Radius Top Block

Freestanding Variable Radius Top blocks are textured on two sides and are used at the top of curved walls where the recesses at the end of the blocks make it easier to cut blocks to turn a radius.

Face

F-VT VARIABLE RADIUS TOP

Face Texture:

Kingstone / Ledgestone

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A087 (BOTTOM VARIABLE RADIUS INSERT)

• R003-A052 (TOP VARIABLE RADIUS INSERT)

• R003-A102 FS FULL GROOVE FORMER 46IN OR R003-A101 FS GROOVE FORMER 40IN STANDARD WITH TWO R003-A050 FS GROOVE FORMER EXTENSIONS

• TWO R002-A095 (KNOB COVERS)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR TOP OF BLOCK AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

MIDDLE BLOCK

R003-A087

Form Assembly

1.

Set up is the same as for the Variable Radius Middle block, except the knobs are removed and the covers are installed. See page 199 for additional form assembly instructions.

Production Notes

Pour

1.

Pour concrete to the bottom lip of the face mold.

2.

Place the top variable radius insert with lifting hook into the top of the block until the steel bar hits the top edge of the form. Clean up excess concrete.

Demolding

1.

Remove the top insert from the form.

2.

Then, demold the block as usual using the lifting hook.

Corner Middle Block

Freestanding Corner Middle blocks are textured on three sides and are used at the beginning and ends of freestanding or retaining walls, as well as in 90 degree corners for retaining walls.

FREESTANDING BLOCKS

F-CM CORNER MIDDLE

Face

Block Library

F-CM CORNER MIDDLE

Limestone

/ Ledgestone

F-CG CORNER GARDEN TOP

F-CB CORNER BOTTOM

CORNER BLOCKS TEXTURED ON THREE FACES

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

8(1172)

TEXTURE VARIES

(457)

KNOBS @ 23 (584) OC, TYP. FACE TEXTURE VARIES 10 (254) DIAMETER x 4 (101) HIGH, TYPICAL. 6 (152) DIAMETER KNOBS AVAILABLE.

FACE TEXTURE VARIES 24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE COBBLESTONE 23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

F-CT CORNER TOP

Block Weight: Block Volume: Face Texture: Block Weight: Block Volume: Face

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE COBBLESTONE 23 (584) ± LIMESTONE 13(330)

FACE TEXTURE VARIES 24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

(457)

LIFTING INSERT OR TEXTURED TOP SURFACE, OPTIONAL

VARIES

FACE TEXTURE VARIES 24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

Cobble / Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone
Cobble / Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone
Cobble / Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone
Cobble / Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A101 (FS GROOVE FORMER 40IN STANDARD)

• TWO R002-A104 (10IN KNOB FORMERS)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR TOP OF BLOCK AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

Form Assembly

1.

If the flat base (R003-A071) is installed in the base of the form, it needs to be removed.

2.

If the filler plates (R003-A100) are installed in the top and bottom panels, they will need to be removed.

3.

Install the freestanding corner mold centered in the base of the form.

4.

If the knobs and groove former are not installed, install now.

Production Notes

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Demolding

1.

The spreader lever is helpful when demolding Freestanding Corner Middle blocks. Use the 41-in (1041-mm) position on the spreader lever to help hold doors open when pulling corner blocks out of forms.

Critical Note: If you open the spreader lever all of the way before lifting most of the weight of the blocks off of the mold with a fork lift or overhead crane, you will tear the corners of the molds. If this happens, the mold will still make good blocks, but extra caution will be needed in keeping the tear clean when closing the mold.

LIFTING INSERT,

90 Degree Corner Block

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE FACE TEXTURE VARIES LIFTING INSERT, OPTIONAL

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE COBBLESTONE

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

Freestanding 90 Degree Corner blocks are used for turning outside 90 degree corners in retaining wall applications.

F-90C 90 DEGREE CORNER

Face Texture:

Cobble / Limestone

Block Weight: 1330 lb (600 kg)

F-90C 90 DEGREE CORNER

Block Volume:

Face Texture:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

4x6x2 (102x152x51) OVAL KNOBS @ 23 (584) OC, TYP.

ft³ (0.26 m³)

Cobble / Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

lb (600 kg)

ft³ (0.26 m³)

13 (330) WIDE GROOVE NEAR END OF BLOCK

CORNER BLOCKS TEXTURED ON THREE FACES OPTIONAL 6 (152) DIAMETER KNOB IN LIEU OF OVAL KNOB THIS LOCATION

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

TOP BLOCK HAS NO SHEAR KNOBS AND A TEXTURED TOP SURFACE.

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE FACE TEXTURE VARIES

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering. 3. Architectural faces on the blocks have varying texture.

Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft (2291 kg ).

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A122 (FS 13IN GROOVE FORMER)

• TWO R002-A104 (10IN KNOB FORMERS)

• TWO R003-A155 (4X6 OVAL KNOB INSERTS)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR TOP OF BLOCK AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

Form Assembly

1.

If the flat base (R003-A071) is installed in the base of the form, it needs to be removed.

2.

If the filler plates (R003-A100) are installed in the top and bottom panels, they will need to be removed.

3.

Remove the standard 40-in (1016-mm) or 46-in (1168-mm) groove former and install the 13-in (330-mm) groove former (R003-A122) with the 13-in (330-mm) end toward the top of the form.

4.

Install the freestanding corner mold centered in the base of the form.

5.

Install the 4x6 knob inserts (R003-A155) into the 10-in (254-mm) knob formers (R003-A155), then install the knob formers in the form.

Critical Note: Do not over tighten so as to deform rubber.

Production Notes

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

Continued

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Demolding

1.

The spreader lever is helpful when demolding 90 Degree Corner blocks. Use the 41-in (1041-mm) position on the spreader lever to help hold doors open when pulling corner blocks out of forms.

Critical Note: If you open the spreader lever all of the way before lifting most of the weight of the blocks off of the mold with a fork lift or overhead crane, you will tear the corners of the molds. If this happens, the mold will still make good blocks, but extra caution will be needed in keeping the tear clean when closing the mold.

Maintenance, Tips & Tricks

1.

Freestanding 90 Degree Corner Blocks are used in retaining wall applications with a 90 degree outside corner.

CORNER BLOCKS TEXTURED ON THREE FACES

Corner Bottom Block

Freestanding Corner Bottom blocks are textured on three sides and are used at the bottom course at the beginning and ends of freestanding or retaining walls, as well as in 90 degree corners for retaining walls.

VARIES

F-CB CORNER BOTTOM

Face Texture:

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone Block

F-CB CORNER BOTTOM

Block

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE 23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

F-CT CORNER TOP

KNOBS @ 23 (584) OC, TYP. FACE TEXTURE VARIES 10 (254) DIAMETER x 4 (101) HIGH, TYPICAL. 6 (152) DIAMETER KNOBS AVAILABLE.

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE COBBLESTONE 23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

3. Architectural faces on the blocks have varying texture.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary. 5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291 kg ). 6. Knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102 mm) tall. Smaller knobs are available.

Cobble / Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone
Cobble / Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone

• RR FS FORM

• TWO R002-A104 (10IN KNOB FORMERS)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR TOP OF BLOCK AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

Form Assembly

1.

If the flat base (R003-A071) is installed in the base of the form, it needs to be removed.

2.

If the filler plates (R003-A100) are installed in the top and bottom panels, they will need to be removed.

3.

Install the freestanding corner mold centered in the base of the form.

4.

Remove the groove former.

Production Notes

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Side View
Full Corner Mold
Full Corner Mold
Side View
Pour concrete to here (Bottom lip of mold)

Demolding

1.

The spreader lever is helpful when demolding Freestanding Corner Bottom blocks. Use the 41-in (1041-mm) position on the spreader lever to help hold doors open when pulling corner blocks out of forms.

Critical Note: If you open the spreader lever all of the way before lifting most of the weight of the blocks off of the mold with a fork lift or overhead crane, you will tear the corners of the molds. If this happens, the mold will still make good blocks, but extra caution will be needed in keeping the tear clean when closing the mold.

Corner Top Block

Freestanding Corner Top blocks are textured on three sides and are used at the top of walls for the beginning and ends of freestanding or retaining walls, as well as in 90 degree corners for retaining walls.

F-CT CORNER TOP

Face Texture:

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A101 (FS GROOVE FORMER 40IN STANDARD)

• TWO R002-A095 (KNOB COVERS)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR TOP OF BLOCK AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

R002-A095

Form Assembly

1.

If the flat base (R003-A071) is installed in the base of the form, it needs to be removed.

2.

If the filler plates (R003-A100) are installed in the top and bottom panels, they will need to be removed.

3.

Install the freestanding corner mold centered in the base of the form.

4.

If the groove former (R003-A047) is not installed, install now.

5.

Remove the knob formers if installed and install the knob covers (R002-A095).

Production Notes

Pour 1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold. Continued

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Demolding

1.

The spreader lever is helpful when demolding Freestanding Corner

Top blocks. Use the 41-in (1041-mm) position on the spreader lever to help hold doors open when pulling corner blocks out of forms.

Critical Note: If you open the spreader lever all of the way before lifting most of the weight of the blocks off of the mold with a fork lift or overhead crane, you will tear the corners of the molds. If this happens, the mold will still make good blocks, but extra caution will be needed in keeping the tear clean when closing the mold.

Maintenance, Tips & Tricks

Tips 1.

If a customer won’t be using a cap on top of the wall and desires a texture on top of the block, a textured top panel (R003-A111) exists to create this option. The top panel of the form would be removed, and the textured top panel would be installed. After the door panels have been switched, install the corner textured top panel rubber (R003-A112) into the door.

Helpful Hint: If blocks with no hook are necessary, a probst lift, clamp or nylon slings will need to be used for storage and placement.

BONDED

Block Library

Half Corner Middle Block

Freestanding Half Corner Middle blocks are textured on three sides and are used at the beginning and ends of freestanding or retaining walls.

Face Texture:

Block Weight:

Block Volume:

F-HCM HALF CORNER MIDDLE

Face Texture:

Cobble / Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone Cobble /

Cobble / Limestone

Face Texture:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Kingstone / Ledgestone Block

CORNER BLOCKS TEXTURED ON THREE FACES

Face Texture:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Cobble / Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone Cobble /

x

(101)

Face Texture:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Form Assembly Option 1 - Freestanding Form

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A101 (FS GROOVE FORMER 40IN STANDARD)

• R002-A104 (10IN KNOB FORMER)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR KNOB FORMER AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

NOTE: ONE FREESTANDING HALF CORNER FACE MOLD IS NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

1.

If the flat base (R003-A071) is installed in the base of the form, it needs to be removed.

HALF CORNER MIDDLE - OPT 1

HALF CORNER MIDDLE - OPT 1

2.

If the filler plates (R003-A100) are installed in the top and bottom panels, they will need to be removed.

3.

Install the freestanding half corner mold centered in the base of the form.

4.

If the groove former (R003-A047) is not installed, install now.

5.

Install the loop holder into the one 10-in (254-mm) knob former (R003-A155), then install the knob former in the bottom knob position of the form.

Production Notes

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Demolding

1.

The spreader lever is helpful when demolding Freestanding Half Corner Middle blocks. Use the 48-in (1219mm) position on the spreader lever to help hold doors open when pulling half corner blocks out of forms.

Critical Note: If you open the spreader lever all of the way before lifting most of the weight of the blocks off of the mold with a fork lift or overhead crane, you will tear the corners of the molds. If this happens, the mold will still make good blocks, but extra caution will be needed in keeping the tear clean when closing the mold.

Half Corner Middle Block

Form Assembly Option 2 - Half Freestanding Form

• R003-A091 HALF FS FORM

• R003-A094 (HALF GROOVE FORMER)

• R002-A104 (10IN KNOB FORMER)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR KNOB FORMER AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

R002-A110 A/R

R002-A152 A/R LOOP HOLDER #6

1.

If the flat base (R003-A071) is installed in the base of the form, it needs to be removed.

2.

If the filler plates (R003-A100) are installed in the top and bottom panels, they will need to be removed.

3.

Install the freestanding half corner mold centered in the base of the form.

4.

If the half groove former (R003-A094) is not installed, install now.

5.

Install the loop holder into the one 10-in (254-mm) knob former (R003-A155), then install the knob former in the form.

Production Notes

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Half Corner Middle Block
Half Corner Mold Side View

Form Assembly Option 3 - Half Door

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A107 (FS HALF PANEL)

• R003-A101 (FS GROOVE FORMER 40IN STANDARD)

• R002-A104 (10IN KNOB FORMER)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR KNOB FORMER AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

1.

If the flat base (R003-A071) is installed in the base of the form, it needs to be removed.

2.

If the filler plates (R003-A100) are installed in the top and bottom panels, they will need to be removed.

3.

Remove one side panel, and install the half panel (R003-A107).

R003-A047
R003-A107
R003-A155

4.

Install the freestanding half corner mold centered in the base of the form.

5.

If the groove former (R003-A047) is not installed, install now.

6.

Install the loop holder into the 10-in (254-mm) knob former (R003-A155), then install the knob former in the bottom knob position of the form.

Production Notes

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Helpful Hint: The half panel makes finishing the half blocks in a freestanding form much easier due to additional access to the block.

Half Corner Middle Block

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

Freestanding

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

Half Corner Bottom Block

Freestanding Half Corner Bottom blocks are textured on three sides and are used in the bottom course at the beginning and ends of freestanding or retaining walls.

F-HCB HALF CORNER BOTTOM F-HCT HALF CORNER

Face Texture:

Cobble / Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone

Face Texture:

/

F-HCB HALF CORNER BOTTOM

Face Texture:

Block Weight:

Block Volume:

Cobble / Limestone

Block Weight:

Block Volume:

Kingstone / Ledgestone

10 (254) DIAMETER x 4 (101) HIGH KNOB, TYPICAL. 6 (152) DIAMETER KNOB AVAILABLE.

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

3. Architectural faces on the blocks have varying texture.

4. Actual block volumes and weights

5. Weights are based upon a concrete

6. Knobs are typically 10" (254mm) Smaller knobs are available.

Cobble

Form Assembly Option 1 - Freestanding Form

• RR FS FORM

• R002-A104 (10IN KNOB FORMER)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR KNOB FORMER AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS

1.

If the flat base (R003-A071) is installed in the base of the form, it needs to be removed.

2.

If the filler plates (R003-A100) are installed in the top and bottom panels,

If the groove former is installed, remove it now.

4.

Install the freestanding half corner mold centered in the base of the form.

5.

Install the loop holder into the one 10-in (254-mm) knob former (R003-A155), then install the knob former in the bottom knob position of the form.

Production Notes

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Demolding

1.

The spreader lever is helpful when demolding Freestanding Half Corner Middle blocks. Use the 48-in (1219mm) position on the spreader lever to help hold doors open when pulling half corner blocks out of forms.

Critical Note: If you open the spreader lever all of the way before lifting most of the weight of the blocks off of the mold with a fork lift or overhead crane, you will tear the corners of the molds. If this happens, the mold will still make good blocks, but extra caution will be needed in keeping the tear clean when closing the mold.

Form Assembly Option 2 - Half Freestanding Form

• R003-A091 HALF FS FORM

• R002-A104 (10IN KNOB FORMER)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR KNOB FORMER AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

1.

If the flat base (R003-A071) is installed in the base of the form, it needs to be removed.

2.

If the filler plates (R003-A100) are installed in the top and bottom panels, they will need to be removed.

If the half groove former (R003-A094) is installed, remove it now.

4.

Install the freestanding half corner mold centered in the base of the form.

5.

Install the loop holder into the one 10-in (254-mm) knob former (R003-A155), then install the knob former in the form.

Production Notes

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Half Corner Bottom Block
Side View
Half Corner Mold
Pour concrete to here
Half Corner Mold Side View
Pour concrete to here (bottom lip of mold)

Form Assembly Option 3 - Half Door

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A107 (FS HALF PANEL)

• R002-A104 (10IN KNOB FORMER)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR KNOB FORMER AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK

HALF CORNER BOTTOM - OPT 3

1.

If the flat base (R003-A071) is installed in the base of the form, it needs to be removed.

HALF CORNER BOTTOM - OPT 3

2.

CORNER BOTTOM - OPT 3

If the filler plates (R003-A100) are installed in the top and bottom panels, they will need to be removed.

3.

Remove one side panel, and install the half panel (R003-A107).

R003-A107
R003-A155

If the groove former is installed, remove it now.

5.

Install the freestanding half corner mold centered in the base of the form.

6.

Install the loop holder into the one 10-in (254-mm) knob former (R003-A155), then install the knob former in the bottom knob position of the form.

Production Notes

Pour 1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Helpful Hint: The half panel makes finishing the half blocks in a Freestanding Form much easier due to additional access to the block.

Half Corner Bottom Block

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

Freestanding

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

Half Corner Top Block

BOTTOM F-HCT HALF CORNER TOP

Kingstone / Ledgestone

TEXTURE VARIES

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

Freestanding Half Corner Top blocks are textured on three sides and are used on the top course at the beginning and ends of freestanding or retaining walls.

Face Texture:

Cobble / Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone

4.9 ft3 (0.14m3) 700 lb (320 kg)

F-HCT HALF CORNER TOP

Face Texture:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

lb (290 kg)

ft3 (0.13m3)

Cobble / Limestone

lb (290 kg)

ft3 (0.13m3)

Kingstone / Ledgestone Block

DIAMETER x 4 (101) HIGH TYPICAL. 6 (152) DIAMETER AVAILABLE.

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

typical unless noted otherwise. Redi-Rock manufacturer. Ordering. varying texture.

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

LIFTING INSERT OR TEXTURED TOP SURFACE, OPTIONAL

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291 kg ).

6. Knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102 mm) tall. Smaller knobs are available.

Form Assembly Option 1 - Freestanding Form

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A101 (FS GROOVE FORMER 40IN STANDARD)

• R002-A095 (KNOB COVER)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR KNOB COVER AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

NOTE: ONE FREESTANDING HALF CORNER FACE MOLD IS NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

1.

If the flat base (R003-A071) is installed in the base of the form, it needs to be removed.

HALF CORNER TOP - OPT 1

2.

If the filler plates (R003-A100) are installed in the top and bottom panels, they will need to be removed.

3.

Install the freestanding half corner mold centered in the base of the form.

4.

If the groove former (R003-A047) is not installed, install now.

5.

Install the loop holder into the knob cover (R002-A095), then install the knob cover on the bottom knob position of the form. Drilling knob cover will be required.

Production Notes

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Demolding

1.

The spreader lever is helpful when demolding Freestanding Half Corner Top blocks. Use the 48-in (1219-mm) position on the spreader lever to help hold doors open when pulling half corner blocks out of forms.

Critical Note: If you open the spreader lever all of the way before lifting most of the weight of the blocks off of the mold with a fork lift or overhead crane, you will tear the corners of the molds. If this happens, the mold will still make good blocks, but extra caution will be needed in keeping the tear clean when closing the mold.

Half

Maintenance, Tips & Tricks

Tips

1.

If a customer won’t be using a cap on top of the wall and desires a texture on top of the block, a textured top panel (R003-A111) exists to create this option. The top panel of the form would be removed, and the textured top panel would be installed. After the door panels have been switched, install the corner textured top panel rubber (R003-A112) into the door.

Helpful Hint: If blocks with no hook are necessary, a probst lift, clamp or nylon slings will need to be used for storage and placement.

Form Assembly Option 2 - Half Freestanding Form

• R003-A091 HALF FS FORM

• R002-A104 (10IN KNOB FORMER)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR KNOB FORMER AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE PARTS

1.

If the flat base (R003-A071) is installed in the base of the form, it needs to be removed.

2.

If the filler plates (R003-A100) are installed in the top and bottom panels, they will need to be removed.

3.

Install the freestanding half corner mold centered in the base of the form.

4.

If the groove former (R003-A094) is not installed, install now.

5.

Install the loop holder into the knob cover (R002-A095), then install the knob cover on the form. Drilling knob cover will be required.

Production Notes

Pour 1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Half Corner Top Block
Side View
Half Corner Mold
Half Corner Mold Side View

Form Assembly Option 3 - Half Door

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A107 (FS HALF PANEL)

• R003-A101 (FS GROOVE FORMER 40IN STANDARD)

• R002-A095 (KNOB COVER)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR KNOB FORMER AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

1.

If the flat base (R003-A071) is installed in the base of the form, it needs to be removed.

2.

If the filler plates (R003-A100) are

Remove one side panel, and install the half panel (R003-A107).

4.

Install the freestanding half corner mold centered in the base of the form.

5.

If the groove former (R003-A047) is not installed, install now. Drilling knob cover will be required.

6.

Install the loop holder into the knob cover (R002-A095), then install the knob cover on the bottom knob position of the form.

Production Notes

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Helpful Hint: The half panel makes finishing the half blocks in a freestanding form much easier due to additional access to the block.

Maintenance, Tips & Tricks

Tips 1.

If a customer won’t be using a cap on top of the wall and desires a texture on top of the block, a textured top panel (R003-A111) exists to create this option. The top panel of the form would be removed, and the textured top panel would be installed. After the door panels have been switched, install the corner textured top panel rubber (R003-A112) into the door.

Helpful Hint: If blocks with no hook are necessary, a probst lift, clamp or nylon slings will need to be used for storage and placement.

Half

R003-A021

R003-A020 5-13 HEX NUT 10 5-13-HN .5 FLAT WASHER 10 .5-FW BOLT PLATE 2

Straight Garden Top Block

Garden Insert Extension 1

R003-0377 1/2"-13X1.5" CARRIAGE BOLT 4

5-13x1 5-CB

Freestanding Straight Garden Top blocks are textured on two sides and have a void in the top of the block to be finished in the field with soil and plantings or poured concrete.

F-SG STRAIGHT GARDEN TOP

Face

R003-A071 FILLER PLATE 2

FREESTANDING FLAT BASE 1

R003-A100

R003-A101

Freestanding 40 IN Groove Former 1

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS

PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION

R002-A105 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #5

R002-A145 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #7

R002-A155 A/R LIFTEYE FORMER TYPE #1

NOTES:

FL1) Compatible options must be selected separately and are not included in th 2) GRAY COMPONENTS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY

FL3) Quantity of fasteners is dependent on loop holder and location of loop hold 4) The default position for the various loop holders & their optional configuratio

REVISION HISTORY

REV ECO NUMBER DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED A ECO-078 Initial Release Liz Radoy

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A071 (FLAT BASE)

• R003-A100 (FILLER PLATE)

R003-A021

R003-A020

Garden Insert 1

Garden Insert Extension 1

5-13 HEX NUT 10 5-13-HN

5 FLAT WASHER 10 5-FW

R003-0377

• R003-A101 FS GROOVE FORMER 40IN STANDARD OR R003-A102 FS FULL GROOVE FORMER 46IN

• R003-A105 (GARDEN INSERT)

.5-13x1.5-CB

R003-A071

R003-A100

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR TOP OF BLOCK AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

R003-A101

NOTE: TWO 18IN FACE MOLDS ARE NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

BOLT PLATE 2

1/2"-13X1 5" CARRIAGE BOLT 4

FREESTANDING FLAT BASE 1

FILLER PLATE 2

Freestanding 40 IN Groove Former 1

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS

PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION

R002-A105 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #5

R002-A145 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #7

R002-A155 A/R LIFTEYE FORMER TYPE #1

NOTES:

FL1) Compatible options must be selected separately and are not included in this assembly 2) GRAY COMPONENTS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY

FL3) Quantity of fasteners is dependent on loop holder and location of loop holder 4) The default position for the various loop holders & their optional configurations are on the

Form Assembly

1.

Install the loop holder into the garden insert.

Helpful Hint: When creating the Freestanding Garden Top block, loop holder #5 should be installed according to the drawings below.

2.

Remove the knob formers or knob covers, and install the garden insert into the form.

Helpful Hint: Make sure both pieces of the garden insert (R003-A020 and R003-A021) are bolted together before installing in the form.

Variable Radius Garden Top Block

Freestanding Variable Radius Garden Top blocks are textured on two sides with recesses at the end of the blocks to make it easier to cut blocks to turn a radius, as well as a void in the top of the block to be finished in the field with soil, plantings, or poured concrete.

F-VG VARIABLE RADIUS GARDEN TOP

Face Texture:

Cobble / Limestone

F-VG VARIABLE RADIUS GARDEN TOP

Block Weight:

Face Texture:

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Face

Block

/ Limestone

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A071 (FLAT BASE)

• R003-A100 (FILLER PLATE)

• R003-A092 (BOTTOM VARIABLE RADIUS GARDEN INSERT)

• R003-A051 (TOP VARIABLE RADIUS GARDEN INSERT)

• R003-A102 (FS FULL GROOVE FORMER 46IN) OR R003-A101 (FS GROOVE FORMER 40IN STANDARD WITH TWO R003-A050 FS GROOVE FORMER EXTENSIONS)

• R003-A105 (GARDEN INSERT)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR TOP OF BLOCK AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

MOLDS

R003-A051
LOOP HOLDER
R003-A092

Form Assembly

1.

Install the 46-in (1168-mm) groove former on the bottom panel; OR install the groove former extensions to the standard 40-in (1016-mm) groove former.

2.

Helpful Hint: it is recommended to use a full length groove former with the variable radius inserts. Some manufacturers do choose to pour it with a shorter groove former; however, this creates excess concrete near the groove that a contractor will need to work around in the field.

Remove the flat base (R003-A071) from the form. The 4-in x 12-in (102mm x 305-mm) bottom variable radius garden insert (R003-A092) bolts to the flat base, then reinstall the base and insert in the form, centering with the filler plates (R003-A100).

3.

Install the loop holder into the garden insert.

Helpful Hint: The top variable radius garden insert (R003-A051) is placed on top of the poured concrete in the form, so it is not actually installed prior to pouring the blocks.

Helpful Hint: When creating the Freestanding Garden Top block, the loop holder should be installed according to the drawings below.

4.

Remove the knob formers or knob covers, and install the garden insert into the form.

5.

If the face molds are not already installed, see page 188 for installation instructions.

Production Notes

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

2.

Place the top variable radius garden insert with lifting hook into the top of the block until the steel bar hits the top edge of the form. Clean up excess concrete.

Demolding

1.

Remove the top variable radius garden insert from the form.

2.

Then, demold the block as usual using the lifting hook in the end of the block.

Helpful Hint: Make sure both pieces of the garden insert (R003-A020 and R003-A021) are bolted together before installing in the form.

Ledgestone

Freestanding

Ledgestone

R003-A021

R003-A020

Corner Garden Top Block

F-CG CORNER GARDEN TOP

Garden Insert 1

Garden Insert Extension 1

.5-13 HEX NUT 10

.5-13-HN .5 FLAT WASHER 10

.5-FW

R003-0377

.5-13x1.5-CB

R003-A071

R003-A100

R003-A101

BOLT PLATE 2

Freestanding Corner Garden Top blocks, which are used at the top of the wall where freestanding or retaining walls start or stop, are textured on three sides and have a void in the top of the block to be finished in the field with soil, plantings, or poured concrete.

Face Texture:

Cobble / Limestone

F-CG CORNER GARDEN TOP

Block Weight:

Face Texture:

Block Volume:

Kingstone / Ledgestone

1/2"-13X1.5" CARRIAGE BOLT 4

FREESTANDING FLAT BASE 1

FILLER PLATE 2

Freestanding 40 IN Groove Former 1

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS

PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION

Cobble / Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone

R002-A105 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #5

R002-A145 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #7

R002-A155 A/R LIFTEYE FORMER TYPE #1

Face Texture:

Block Weight:

Block Volume:

Cobble / Limestone

NOTES:

FL1) Compatible options must be selected separately and are not included in t 2) GRAY COMPONENTS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY

FL3) Quantity of fasteners is dependent on loop holder and location of loop ho 4) The default position for the various loop holders & their optional configurat

Kingstone / Ledgestone

HISTORY

Liz Radoy

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A101 (FS GROOVE FORMER 40IN STANDARD)

• R003-A105 (GARDEN INSERT WITHOUT EXTENSION)

Garden Insert 1 R003-A021

R003-A020

.5-13-HN

Garden Insert Extension 1

.5-13 HEX NUT 10

5 FLAT WASHER 10 5-FW

R003-0377

BOLT PLATE 2

1/2"-13X1.5" CARRIAGE BOLT 4 .5-13x1.5-CB

R003-A071

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR TOP OF BLOCK AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

R003-A100

R003-A101

FREESTANDING FLAT BASE 1

FILLER PLATE 2

Freestanding 40 IN Groove Former 1

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS

PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION

R002-A105 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #5

R003-A0

5-13-HN

5-13x1

R003-A071

NOTES:

R002-A145 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #7

R002-A155 A/R LIFTEYE FORMER TYPE #1

FL1) Compatible options must be selected separately and are not included in this assembly. 2) GRAY COMPONENTS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY

holder and location of loop holder.

The default position for the various loop holders & their optional configurations are on the following pages.

R003-A066 CORNER MOLD ASSEMBLY NOTE: ONE FREESTANDING CORNER FACE MOLD IS NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

REVISION HISTORY REV ECO NUMBER DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED A ECO-078 Initial Release Liz Radoy

Initial Release Liz Radoy

FL3) Quantity of fasteners is dependent on loop holder and location of loop holder 4) The default position for the various loop holders & their optional configurations are on the fo

Form Assembly

1.

If the flat base (R003-A071) is installed in the base of the form, it needs to be removed.

2.

If the filler plates (R003-A100) are installed in the top and bottom panels, they will need to be removed.

3.

Install the freestanding corner mold centered in the base of the form.

4.

Remove the extension from the garden insert (R003-A020), and install the loop holder into the garden insert (R003-A021).

Helpful Hint: When

5.

Remove the knob formers or knob covers, and install the garden insert into the form.

Helpful Hint: Make sure the two pieces of the garden insert are not bolted together and only the larger portion (R003-A021) is installed.

6.

If the groove former (R003-A101) is not installed, install now.

Production Notes

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Side View
Full Corner Mold
Full Corner Mold Side View
Pour concrete to here (Bottom lip of mold)

Demolding

1.

The spreader lever is helpful when demolding Freestanding Corner Garden Top blocks. Use the 41-in (1041-mm) position on the spreader lever to help hold doors open when pulling corner blocks out of forms.

Critical Note: If you open the spreader lever all of the way before lifting most of the weight of the blocks off of the mold with a fork lift or overhead crane, you will tear the corners of the molds. If this happens, the mold will still make good blocks, but extra caution will be needed in keeping the tear clean when closing the mold.

Half Corner Garden Top Block

Freestanding Half Corner Garden Top blocks are shorter blocks used at the top of the wall where freestanding or retaining walls start or stop, and they are textured on three sides with a void in the top of the block to be finished in the field with soil, plantings, or poured concrete.

Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone Cobble / Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone

F-HCG HALF CORNER GARDEN TOP

Face Texture: Cobble / Limestone

/ Ledgestone

± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone

Cobble / Limestone Kingstone / Ledgestone

Form Assembly Option 1 - Freestanding Form

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A101 (FS GROOVE FORMER 40IN STANDARD)

• R003-A105 (GARDEN INSERT WITHOUT EXTENSION) OR R003-A103 (HALF (GARDEN INSERT WITHOUT EXTENSION)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR TOP OF BLOCK AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

1.

If the flat base (R003-A071) is installed in the base of the form, it needs to be removed.

2.

If the filler plates (R003-A100) are installed in the top and bottom panels, they will need to be removed.

If the groove former (R003-A047) is not installed, install now.

4.

Remove the extension (R003-A020) from the garden insert and install the loop holder into the larger portion of the garden insert (R003-A021).

Helpful Hint: The half garden insert (R003-A099) without the extension (R003-A020) can also be used in this form configuration option.

5.

Remove the knob formers or knob covers, and install the garden insert into the form.

Helpful Hint: When creating the Freestanding Half Corner Garden Top block, the loop holder should be installed according to the drawings below.

Helpful Hint: Make sure the two pieces of the garden insert are not bolted together and only the larger portion (R003-A021 or R003-A099) is installed.

6.

If the groove former (R003-A047) is not installed, install now.

ion Loop Holder Is In the Bottom Position

Production Notes

Pour 1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Demolding

1.

The spreader lever is helpful when demolding Freestanding Corner Garden Top blocks. Use the 48-in (1219-mm) position on the spreader lever to help hold doors open when pulling corner blocks out of forms.

Critical Note: If you open the spreader lever all of the way before lifting most of the weight of the blocks off of the mold with a fork lift or overhead crane, you will tear the corners of the molds. If this happens, the mold will still make good blocks, but extra caution will be needed in keeping the tear clean when closing the mold.

Half Corner Mold

Form Assembly Option 2 - Half Freestanding Form

• R003-A091 (HALF FS FORM)

• R003-A094 (HALF GROOVE FORMER)

• R003-A103 (HALF GARDEN INSERT WITHOUT EXTENSION)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR KNOB COVER AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

If the flat base (R003-A071) is installed in the base of the form, it needs to be removed.

2.

If the filler plates (R003-A100) are installed in the top and bottom panels, they will need to be removed.

Install the freestanding half corner mold centered in the base of the form.

4.

Remove the extension (R003-A020) from the half garden insert (R003-A099) and install the loop holder into the garden insert.

5.

Remove the knob former or knob cover, and install the half garden insert into the form. 6.

If the half groove former (R003-A094) is not installed, install now.

Helpful Hint: Make sure the two pieces of the garden insert are not bolted together and only the larger portion (R003-A099) is installed.

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Half

Form Assembly Option 3 - Half Door

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A107 (FS HALF PANEL)

• R003-A101 (FS GROOVE FORMER 40IN STANDARD)

• R003-A105 (GARDEN INSERT WITHOUT EXTENSION) OR R003-A103 (HALF (GARDEN INSERT WITHOUT EXTENSION)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR KNOB FORMER AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

40" Groove Former 1

R003-A071

1.

If the flat base (R003-A071) is installed in the base of the form, it needs to be removed.

2.

If the filler plates (R003-A100) are installed in the top and bottom panels, they will need to be removed.

3.

Remove one side panel, and install the half panel (R003-A107).

4.

Install the freestanding half corner mold centered in the base of the form.

5.

Remove the extension from the garden insert (R003-A020) and install the loop holder into the garden insert (R003-A021).

Helpful Hint: The half garden insert (R003-A099) without the extension (R003-A020) can also be used in this form configuration option.

Helpful Hint: When creating the Freestanding Half Corner Garden Top block, the loop holder should be installed according to the drawings below.

Half Corner Garden Top Block

Remove the knob formers or knob covers, and install the garden insert into the form.

7.

If the groove former (R003-A047) is not installed, install now.

Production Notes

Pour 1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Helpful Hint: Make sure the two pieces of the garden insert are not bolted together and only the larger portion (R003-A021 or R003-A099) is installed.

Helpful Hint: The half panel makes finishing the half blocks in a freestanding form much easier due to additional access to the block.

R003-A044

R003-A046

Freestanding

6 IN VERT

CONDUIT RETAINER - 3 IN HORIZ

R003-A041 L ROD 1

SPLITTER 1

R003-0107

R003-0338

FILLER BAR 1

Force Protection Middle Block

FREESTANDING BLOCKS

Block Library

Freestanding Force Protection Middle blocks are textured on two sides and used in scenarios where tying the blocks together with additional connectors is specified by an engineer.

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL2)

PART NUMBER QTY

F-FM FORCE PROTECTION MIDDLE

F-FM FORCE PROTECTION MIDDLE

/ Limestone Face

Face

Block

DESCRIPTION

R002-A108 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #1

R002-A155 A/R LIFTEYE FORMER TYPE #1

Kingstone / Ledgestone

/ Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

KNOBS @ 23 (584) OC, TYP.

Cobble / Limestone

10.23 ft3 (0.290 m3)

6 (152) DIAMETER x 18 (457) TALL RECESS EACH END

CAST-IN #4 (#13) REBAR HOOK EACH END

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Notes

LEDGESTONE COBBLESTONE

1) GRAY COMPONENTS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY FL2) Compatible options must be selected separately and are not included in

REVISION HISTORY

ZONE REV DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED A Initial Release 9/8/2021 G HEINZ

FACE TEXTURE VARIES 10 (254) DIAMETER x 4 (102) HIGH, TYPICAL. 6 (152) DIAMETER KNOBS AVAILABLE.

3 (76) DIAMETER HORIZONTAL VOID FULL LENGTH OF BLOCK, TYP.

24 (610) ±

(584) ±

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A071 (FLAT BASE)

• R003-A100 (FILLER PLATE)

• R003-A101 (FS GROOVE FORMER 40IN STANDARD) OR R003-A102 (FS FULL GROOVE FORMER 46IN)

• TWO R002-A104 (10IN KNOB FORMERS)

• R003-A108 (FORCE PROTECTION KIT)

R003-A046

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR TOP OF BLOCK AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

2 R003-A039 BOTTOM INSERT 2 R003-A042

LIFTEYE FORMER - 6 IN VERT TUBE 2 R003-A044 CONDUIT RETAINER - 3 IN HORIZ CONDUIT 2 R003-A046 SPLITTER 1 R003-A041 L ROD 1 R003-0107 FILLER BAR 1 R003-0338

NOTE: TWO 18IN FACE MOLDS ARE NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

Form Assembly

1.

Install the filler plates (R003-A100) in the top and bottom door panels near the base of the form using the existing holes.

2.

The force protection components will be installed on the flat base insert (R003-A071), so if it is installed, remove it from the form. First install the force protection bottom insert (R003-A042) on the corresponding holes of the flat base – this part will slide under the groove former. Next install the lifteye former (R003-A044); the open side of this is positioned toward the bottom insert (R003-A042). Next, install the top insert (R003-A039) against the lifteye former; and finally secure the conduit retainer (R003-A046) through the top insert and base.

3.

Helpful Hint: The holes in the flat base insert are offset, so the force protection kit can only be installed one way.

Position the flat base insert (R003-A071) with the force protection components in the bottom of the form, centering it with the filler plates on the top and bottom door panels. Bolt in place.

4.

Install the groove former (R003-A047) if not already installed.

5.

Install two 18-in (457-mm) face molds on the side panel doors if not already installed. See page 188 for instructions.

6.

Install the knob formers (R003-A155) and lifting insert if they are not already installed.

Production Notes

Prep

1.

With the block being poured vertically, make sure to apply release agent on the undersides of surfaces in the face mold to facilitate demolding and prevent unneeded wear and tear on the face mold.

Critical Note: Be sure to apply release agent on the top portion of the force protection kit before installing it on the form.

2.

Install the force protection hook or engineer-specified reinforcement into the bottom lifteye former (R003-A044) before closing the form.

Helpful Hint: If wall design requires cable through the block, install the 3-in (76mm) conduit now onto the bottom conduit retainer. Continued

3.

Close the form. Install the top portion of the kit to the fully closed form, using the holes provided in the top and bottom panels. The L-shaped pin (R003-0107) slides in and holds the force protection hook or engineer-specified reinforcement into the top insert.

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

Demolding

1.

Remove the L-shaped pin and the top portion of the kit from the form.

2.

Use a pry bar to aid in opening the forms. Do not hammer on forms.

Helpful Hint: The appropriate pry point for freestanding forms will vary depending on what generation form they are. Older forms will have a tab halfway down the side panel to use as a leverage point. Newer forms are designed with a notch towards the top of the panel for the pry bar placement.

Helpful Hint: Do not allow panels to slam open hard on rails. Protecting the form from unnecessary wear and tear will help to prolong the life of your investment.

Maintenance, Tips & Tricks

Tips

1.

The connection between blocks will be specified per the engineer’s design for the wall. Commonly, a J-bolt and clip are used to connect the blocks.

Helpful Hint: See page xxxvi in the Appendix for more information on J-bolts and clips. Continued

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

Force Protection Bottom Block

VARIES

Freestanding Force Protection Bottom blocks are textured on two sides and used at the bottom of walls where tying the blocks together with additional connectors is specified by an engineer.

F-FB FORCE PROTECTION BOTTOM

F-FB FORCE PROTECTION BOTTOM

Face Texture:

Face Texture:

Block

KNOBS @

Cobble / Limestone

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE 23 (584) ± LIMESTONE FACE TEXTURE VARIES

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

3. Architectural faces on the blocks have varying texture.

4. Actual block volumes and weights may vary. 5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft (2291 kg/m3). 6. Knobs are typically 10" (254mm) diameter by 4" (102 mm) tall. Smaller knobs are available.

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A071 (FLAT BASE)

• R003-A100 (FILLER PLATE)

PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

R003-A042 LIFTEYE FORMER - 6 IN VERT TUBE 2 R003-A044 CONDUIT RETAINER - 3 IN HORIZ CONDUIT 2 R003-A046

• TWO R002-A104 (10IN KNOB FORMERS)

• R003-A108 (FORCE PROTECTION KIT)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR TOP OF BLOCK AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

2

R003-A039 BOTTOM INSERT 2 R003-A042

LIFTEYE FORMER - 6 IN VERT TUBE 2 R003-A044

CONDUIT RETAINER - 3 IN HORIZ CONDUIT 2 R003-A046 SPLITTER 1 R003-A041 L ROD 1 R003-0107 FILLER BAR 1 R003-0338 5-13 HEX

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL2)

QTY DESCRIPTION R002-A108 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #1 R002-A155 A/R LIFTEYE FORMER TYPE #1

6 5-13-HN 5

6 5-FW

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL2) PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION R002-A108

NOTE: TWO 18IN FACE MOLDS ARE NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

REVISION HISTORY ZONE REV DESCRIPTION A Initial Release Notes 1) GRAY COMPONENTS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONL FL2) Compatible options must be selected separate

Form Assembly

1.

Install the filler plates (R003-A100) in the top and bottom door panels near the base of the form using the existing holes.

2.

The force protection components will be installed on the flat base insert (R003-A071), so if it is installed, remove it from the form. First install the force protection bottom insert (R003-A042) on the corresponding holes of the flat base – this part will slide under the groove former. Next install the lifteye former (R003-A044); the open side of this is positioned toward the bottom insert (R003-A042). Next, install the top insert (R003-A039) against the lifteye former; and finally secure the conduit retainer (R003-A046) through the top insert and base.

3.

Helpful Hint: The holes in the flat base insert are offset, so the force protection kit can only be installed one way.

Position the flat base insert (R003-A071) with the force protection components in the bottom of the form, centering it with the filler plates on the top and bottom door panels. Bolt in place.

If the groove former is installed, remove it.

5.

Install two 18-in (457-mm) face molds on the side panel doors if not already installed. See page 188 for instructions.

6.

Install the knob formers (R003-A155) and lifting insert if they are not already installed.

Production Notes

Prep

1.

With the block being poured vertically, make sure to apply release agent on the undersides of surfaces in the face mold to facilitate demolding and prevent unneeded wear and tear on the face mold.

Critical Note: Be sure to apply release agent on the top portion of the force protection kit before installing it on the form.

2.

Install the force protection hook or engineer-specified reinforcement into the bottom lifteye former (R003-A044) before closing the form.

Helpful Hint: If wall design requires cable through the block, install the 3-in (76mm) conduit now onto the bottom conduit retainer. Continued

3.

Close the form. Install the top portion of the kit to the fully closed form, using the holes provided in the top and bottom panels. The L-shaped pin (R003-0107) slides in and holds the force protection hook or engineer-specified reinforcement into the top insert.

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

Demolding

1.

Remove the L-shaped pin and the top portion of the kit from the form.

2.

Use a pry bar to aid in opening the forms. Do not hammer on forms.

Helpful Hint: The appropriate pry point for freestanding forms will vary depending on what generation form they are. Older forms will have a tab halfway down the side panel to use as a leverage point. Newer forms are designed with a notch towards the top of the panel for the pry bar placement.

Maintenance, Tips & Tricks

Tips

1.

The connection between blocks will be specified per the engineer’s design for the wall. Commonly, a J-bolt and clip are used to connect the blocks. See page xxxvi for this construction detail.

Helpful Hint: Do not allow panels to slam open hard on rails. Protecting the form from unnecessary wear and tear will help to prolong the life of your investment.

Helpful Hint: See page xxxvi in the Appendix for more information on J-bolts and clips.

Force Protection Top Block

Freestanding Force Protection Top blocks are textured on two sides used at the top of walls in scenarios where tying the blocks together with additional connectors is specified by an engineer.

F-FT FORCE PROTECTION TOP

F-FT FORCE PROTECTION TOP

Face

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A071 (FLAT BASE)

• R003-A100 (FILLER PLATE)

• TWO R002-A095 (KNOB COVERS)

• R003-A108 (FORCE PROTECTION KIT)

R003-A039 BOTTOM INSERT 2

R003-A042

R003-A046

R003-A041

• R003-A101 (FS GROOVE FORMER 40IN STANDARD) OR R003-A102 (FS FULL GROOVE FORMER 46IN)

R003-0338

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR TOP OF BLOCK AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

QTY PART NUMBER TOP INSERT 2 R003-A039 BOTTOM INSERT 2 R003-A042 LIFTEYE FORMER - 6 IN VERT TUBE 2 R003-A044 CONDUIT RETAINER - 3 IN HORIZ CONDUIT 2 R003-A046 SPLITTER 1 R003-A041 L ROD 1 R003-0107 FILLER BAR 1 R003-0338 5-13 HEX NUT 6 5-13-HN 5

QTY DESCRIPTION

R002-A108 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #1

R002-A155 A/R LIFTEYE FORMER TYPE #1

Form Assembly

1.

Install the filler plates (R003-A100) in the top and bottom door panels near the base of the form using the existing holes.

2.

The force protection components will be installed on the flat base insert (R003-A071), so if it is installed, remove it from the form. First install the force protection bottom insert (R003-A042) on the corresponding holes of the flat base – this part will slide under the groove former. Next install the lifteye former (R003-A044); the open side of this is positioned toward the bottom insert (R003-A042). Next, install the top insert (R003-A039) against the lifteye former; and finally secure the conduit retainer (R003-A046) through the top insert and base.

3.

Helpful Hint: The holes in the flat base insert are offset, so the force protection kit can only be installed one way.

Position the flat base insert (R003-A071) with the force protection components in the bottom of the form, centering it with the filler plates on the top and bottom door panels. Bolt in place.

Install the groove former (R003-A047) if not already installed. 5.

Install two 18-in (457-mm) face molds on the side panel doors if not already installed. See page 188 for instructions.

6.

If the knob formers (R003-A155) are installed, remove them and install the knob covers (R002-A095). 7.

Install the lifting insert if not already installed.

Production Notes

Prep

1.

With the block being poured vertically, make sure to apply release agent on the undersides of surfaces in the face mold to facilitate demolding and prevent unneeded wear and tear on the face mold.

Critical Note: Be sure to apply release agent on the top portion of the force protection kit before installing it on the form.

2.

Install the force protection hook or engineer-specified reinforcement into the bottom lifteye former (R003-A044) before closing the form.

Helpful Hint: If wall design requires cable through the block, install the 3-in (76mm) conduit now onto the bottom conduit retainer.

3.

Close the form. Install the top portion of the kit to the fully closed form, using the holes provided in the top and bottom panels. The L-shaped pin (R003-0107) slides in and holds the force protection hook or engineer-specified reinforcement into the top insert.

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

Demolding

1.

Remove the L-shaped pin and the top portion of the kit from the form.

2.

Use a pry bar to aid in opening the forms. Do not hammer on forms.

Helpful Hint: The appropriate pry point for freestanding forms will vary depending on what generation form they are. Older forms will have a tab halfway down the side panel to use as a leverage point. Newer forms are designed with a notch towards the top of the panel for the pry bar placement.

Maintenance, Tips & Tricks

Tips

1.

The connection between blocks will be specified per the engineer’s design for the wall. Commonly, a J-bolt and clip are used to connect the blocks. See page xxxvi for this construction detail.

Helpful Hint: Do not allow panels to slam open hard on rails. Protecting the form from unnecessary wear and tear will help to prolong the life of your investment.

Helpful Hint: See page xxxvi in the Appendix for more information on J-bolts and clips.

Hollow-Core Block

Block Library

Freestanding Hollow-Core blocks have rebar alignment features and a hollowcore to allow for concrete reinforcement in the field for barrier, water retention, cantilever, or cast-in-place wall applications.

F-HC HOLLOW-CORE

F-HC HOLLOW-CORE

Face Texture:

Face Texture:

Block Weight:

Block Volume:

Cobble / Limestone

Cobble / Limestone

F-HHC HALF HOLLOW-CORE

Face Texture:

Block

Cobble / Limestone

F-CHC CORNER HOLLOW-CORE

Face Texture:

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Cobble / Limestone

R003-A029 A/R REBAR ALIGNMENT VOID INSERT C

Block Weight:

Block Volume:

HALF CORNER HOLLOW-CORE

Kingstone / Ledgestone
Kingstone / Ledgestone
Kingstone / Ledgestone
Kingstone / Ledgestone

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A082 (FS HOLLOW-CORE KIT)

• R003-A071 (FLAT BASE)

• R003-A100 (FILLER PLATES)

• TWO R002-A095 (KNOB COVERS)

R003-A028

R003-A079

R003-A080

HOLLOW-CORE INSERT - LOWER 1

HOLLOW-CORE INSERT - UPPER 1

HOLLOW-CORE INSERT - CORNER 2 R003-A081

Hollow-Core

Form Assembly

1.

Install flat base insert (R003-A071) and two filler plates (R003-A100) at the bottom of the form. Remove any bolts that will interfere with the hollow-core inserts.

2.

Bolt together the two pieces of the hollow-core bottom insert (R003-A079 and R003-A081).

3.

Remove the groove former, and install the entire hollow-core bottom insert (R003-A079 and R003-A081). Do not tighten bolts.

4.

Bolt together the two pieces of the hollow-core top insert (R003-A080 and R003-A081).

5.

Remove knob formers or knob covers if installed, then install the entire hollow-core upper insert (R003-A080 and R003-A081) through the knob cover holes. Install the knob covers, but do not tighten bolts.

6.

Install the top rebar alignment insert (R003-A026) and the bottom rebar alignment insert (R003-A028). Make sure to align the nubs on the rubber inserts with the holes in the steel inserts. Continued

7.

Install face molds. Ensure that molds are positioned so that the distance from the base insert to the edge of the texture face is 46 ⅛ in (1172 mm). See page 194 for additional instructions.

Helpful Hint: When installing Ledgestone 5, ensure that the mold is oriented with texture ribbing nearest top side of the form to avoid potentially breaking blocks.

8.

Close the form. Tighten all insert bolts.

9.

Measure the width of the form opening. Ensure that the block height opening is within 18 in +/- 1/16 in (457 mm +/- 1.5 mm).

Production Notes

Prep

1.

Remove the top and bottom rebar alignment inserts and spray with release agent. Spray the rest of the form with release agent.

Helpful Hint: Applying oil to the contact surfaces between the rubber inserts and steel inserts, as well as the end surfaces of the rebar alignment inserts and groove forming features, will aid in proper release of the inserts and help prevent buildup of concrete between the inserts. Continued

Hollow-Core

2.

Reinstall the rubber inserts, ensuring they are seated tight between both steel inserts when the form is closed. Failure to do so will result in out of tolerance blocks and/or inserts embedded in the block.

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

Helpful Hint: If you’re using internal vibration when pouring, adjust the method and duration for the reduced concrete volume of freestanding hollow-core blocks.

Demolding

1.

Before demolding, ensure concrete has cured to proper strength. With less concrete volume, the block will crack easier if not sufficiently cured.

2.

Most commonly, manufacturers use a nylon strap to remove Freestanding Hollow-Core blocks from the form. Then, two nylon straps around the two center beams of concrete are used to move blocks to storage.

3.

During cleaning, pay close attention to the surfaces where the rubber contacts the steel inserts.

Helpful Hint: Failure to clean these surfaces properly will prevent the rubber inserts from installing properly and cause out of tolerance blocks.

Maintenance, Tips & Tricks

Maintenance

1.

Regularly check the height measurement with the form doors closed remains 18 in +/- 1/16 in (457 mm +/- 1.5 mm). If the form is out of tolerance, adjust the inserts accordingly.

Hollow-Core Block

Freestanding

FACE TEXTURE VARIES FACE TEXTURE VARIES

Half Hollow-Core Block

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

Freestanding Half Hollow-Core blocks are used in hollow-core wall applications to maintain the running bond, oftentimes when the wall abuts an existing structure.

F-HHC HALF HOLLOW-CORE

F-HHC HALF HOLLOW-CORE

Face Texture:

Cobble / Limestone

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise.

2. Confirm block production with licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer.

3. Architectural faces on the blocks have varying texture.

4. Average block weights shown. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

5. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291 kg ).

F-HCHC HALF CORNER

Form Assembly Option 1 - Freestanding Form

REBAR ALIGNMENT VOID INSERT B 1

R003-A028 HALF HOLLOW-CORE INSERT - LOWER 1

R003-A074 HALF HOLLOW-CORE INSERT - UPPER 1

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A071 (FLAT BASE)

• R003-A100 (FILLER PLATES)

• TWO R002-A095 (KNOB COVERS)

NOTE: TWO 18IN HALF FACE MOLDS ARE NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

base

R003-A076 HOLLOW-CORE INSERT - CORNER 2

R003-A081

• R003-A082 (FS HOLLOW-CORE KIT) OR R003-A078 (HALF HOLLOWCORE KIT)

R002-A095 FREESTANDING FLAT BASE 1

R003-A100

R003-A071 FILLER PLATE 2

OPTIONS

R003-A029 A/R REBAR ALIGNMENT VOID INSERT C

2.

Bolt together the two pieces of the hollow-core bottom insert (R003-A079 or R003-A074 and R003-A081).

3.

Remove the groove former, and install the entire hollow-core bottom insert (R003-A079 or R003-A074 and R003-A081). Do not tighten bolts.

4.

Bolt together the two pieces of the hollow-core top insert (R003-A080 or R003-A076 and R003-A081).

Helpful Hint: If using the half hollow-core kit the bottom insert will be part R003-A074.

5.

Remove knob formers or knob covers if installed, then install the entire hollow-core upper insert (R003-A080 or R003-A076 and R003-A081) through the knob cover holes. Install the knob covers, but do not tighten bolts.

6.

Install the bottom rebar alignment insert (R003-A028). Make sure to align the nubs on the rubber inserts with the holes in the steel inserts.

7.

Install face molds. Ensure that molds are positioned so that the distance from the base insert to the edge of the texture face is 46 ⅛ in (1172 mm). See page 194 for additional instructions.

Helpful Hint: If using the half hollow-core kit the top insert will be part R003-A076. Continued

Close the form. Tighten all insert bolts.

9.

Measure the width of the form opening. Ensure that the block height opening is within 18 in +/- 1/16 in (457 mm +/- 1.5 mm).

Production Notes

Prep

1.

Remove the bottom rebar alignment inserts and spray with release agent. Spray the rest of the form with release agent.

2.

Reinstall the rubber insert, ensuring they are seated tight between both steel inserts when the form is closed. Failure to do so will result in out of tolerance blocks and/or inserts embedded in the block.

Helpful Hint: Applying oil to the contact surfaces between the rubber inserts and steel inserts, as well as the end surfaces of the rebar alignment inserts and groove forming features, will aid in proper release of the inserts and help prevent buildup of concrete between the inserts.

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

Helpful Hint: If you’re using internal vibration when pouring, adjust the method and duration for the reduced concrete volume of freestanding hollow-core blocks.

Half
Hollow-Core Block

Demolding

1.

Before demolding, ensure concrete has cured to proper strength. With less concrete volume, the block will crack easier if not sufficiently cured.

2.

Most commonly, manufacturers use a nylon strap to remove Freestanding Hollow-Core Half blocks from the form. They wrap the strap around the center beam of concrete to move the blocks to storage.

3.

During cleaning, pay close attention to the surfaces where the rubber contacts the steel inserts.

Helpful Hint: Failure to clean these surfaces properly will prevent the rubber inserts from installing properly and cause out of tolerance blocks.

Maintenance, Tips & Tricks

Maintenance

1.

Regularly check the height measurement with the form doors closed remains 18 in +/- 1/16 in (457 mm +/- 1.5 mm). If the form is out of tolerance, adjust the inserts accordingly.

Form Assembly Option 2 - Half Freestanding Form

• RR FS HALF FORM

• R003-A078 (HALF HOLLOW-CORE KIT)

• R003-A071 (FLAT BASE)

• R003-A100 (FILLER PLATES)

• R002-A095 (KNOB COVER)

NOTE: TWO 18IN HALF FACE MOLDS ARE NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE. 1. Install flat base insert (R003-A071) and two filler plates (R003-A100) at the bottom of the form. Remove any bolts that will interfere with the hollow-core inserts.

Bolt together the two pieces of the hollow-core bottom insert (R003-A074 and R003-A081).

3.

Remove the groove former, and install the entire hollow-core bottom insert (R003-A074 and R003-A081). Do not tighten bolts.

4.

Bolt together the two pieces of the hollow-core top insert (R003-A076 and R003-A081).

5.

Remove knob former or knob cover if installed, then install the entire hollow-core upper insert (R003-A076 and R003-A081) through the knob cover holes. Install the knob cover, but do not tighten bolts.

6.

Install the bottom rebar alignment insert (R003-A028). Make sure to align the nubs on the rubber inserts with the holes in the steel inserts.

7.

Install the 18-in (457-mm) half face molds. Ensure that molds are positioned so that the distance from the base insert to the middle lip of the texture is 23 in (584 mm). A portion of the rubber mold will extend beyond the form.

8.

Close the form. Tighten all insert bolts.

Continued

9.

Measure the width of the form opening. Ensure that the block height opening is within 18 in +/- 1/16 in (457 mm +/- 1.5 mm).

Production Notes

Prep 1.

Remove the bottom rebar alignment inserts and spray with release agent. Spray the rest of the form with release agent.

2.

Reinstall the rubber insert, ensuring they are seated tight between both steel inserts when the form is closed. Failure to do so will result in out of tolerance blocks and/or inserts embedded in the block.

Helpful Hint: Applying oil to the contact surfaces between the rubber inserts and steel inserts, as well as the end surfaces of the rebar alignment inserts and groove forming features, will aid in proper release of the inserts and help prevent buildup of concrete between the inserts.

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

Helpful Hint: If you’re using internal vibration when pouring, adjust the method and duration for the reduced concrete volume of freestanding hollow-core blocks.

Half
Hollow-Core Block

Demolding

1.

Before demolding, ensure concrete has cured to proper strength. With less concrete volume, the block will crack easier if not sufficiently cured.

2.

Most commonly, manufacturers use a nylon strap to remove Freestanding Hollow-Core Half blocks from the form. They wrap the strap around the center beam of concrete to move the blocks to storage.

3.

During cleaning, pay close attention to the surfaces where the rubber contacts the steel inserts.

Helpful Hint: Failure to clean these surfaces properly will prevent the rubber inserts from installing properly and cause out of tolerance blocks.

Maintenance, Tips & Tricks

Maintenance

1.

Regularly check the height measurement with the form doors closed remains 18 in +/- 1/16 in (457 mm +/- 1.5 mm). If the form is out of tolerance, adjust the inserts accordingly.

Corner Hollow-Core Block

R002-A095

R003-A029

Freestanding Hollow-Core Corner blocks are used at the beginning and ends of hollow-core wall applications.

F-CHC CORNER HOLLOW-CORE

F-CHC CORNER HOLLOW-CORE

/ Limestone

Face

R003-A079

R003-A080

REBAR ALIGNMENT VOID INSERT C 1

HOLLOW-CORE INSERT - LOWER 1

HOLLOW-CORE INSERT - UPPER 1

R003-A026 .5-13 HEX NUT 8 .5-13-HN 5 FLAT WASHER 8

Cobble / Limestone

Kingstone / Ledgestone Ledgestone

F-HCHC HALF CORNER HOLLOW-CORE

Kingstone / Ledgestone

REBAR ALIGNMENT VOID INSERT A 1

Kingstone / Ledgestone

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A082 (FS HOLLOW-CORE KIT)

• R003-A029 (CORNER REBAR ALIGNMENT INSERT)

• TWO R002-A095 (KNOB COVERS) PARTS

Form Assembly

1.

Remove flat base insert (R003-A071) and two filler plates (R003-A100) at the bottom of the form. Remove any bolts that will interfere with the hollow-core inserts.

2.

Install the corner mold.

3.

If connected, separate the two pieces of the hollow-core bottom insert (R003-A079 and R003-A081).

4.

Remove the groove former, and install the hollow-core bottom insert (R003-A079). Do not tighten bolts.

5.

If connected, separate the two pieces of the hollow-core top insert (R003-A080 and R003-A081).

6.

Remove knob formers or knob covers if installed, then install the hollow-core upper insert (R003-A080) through the knob cover holes. Install the knob covers, but do not tighten bolts.

7.

Install the top rebar alignment insert (R003-A026) and the corner rebar alignment insert (R003-A029). Make sure to align the nubs on the rubber inserts with the holes in the steel inserts. Continued

8.

Close the form. Tighten all insert bolts.

9.

Measure the width of the form opening. Ensure that the block height opening is within 18" +/- 1/16".

Production Notes Prep

1.

Remove the top and bottom rebar alignment inserts and spray with release agent. Spray the rest of the form with release agent.

2.

Reinstall the rubber inserts, ensuring they are seated tight between both steel inserts when the form is closed. Failure to do so will result in out of tolerance blocks and/or inserts embedded in the block.

Helpful Hint: Applying oil to the contact surfaces between the rubber inserts and steel inserts, as well as the end surfaces of the rebar alignment inserts and groove forming features, will aid in proper release of the inserts and help prevent buildup of concrete between the inserts.

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

Helpful Hint: If you’re using internal vibration when pouring, adjust the method and duration for the reduced concrete volume of freestanding hollow-core blocks. Continued

Demolding

1.

Before demolding, ensure concrete has cured to proper strength. With less concrete volume, the block will crack easier if not sufficiently cured.

2.

Most commonly, manufacturers use a nylon strap to remove Freestanding Hollow-Core Corner blocks from the form. Then, two nylon straps around the two center beams of concrete are used to move blocks to storage.

3.

During cleaning, pay close attention to the surfaces where the rubber contacts the steel inserts.

Helpful Hint: Failure to clean these surfaces properly will prevent the rubber inserts from installing properly and cause out of tolerance blocks.

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

Half Corner Hollow-Core Block

COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

Kingstone / Ledgestone

COBBLESTONE

The Freestanding Half Corner Hollow-Core block is used at the beginning and ends, as well as every other course at the corners, of hollow-core wall applications to maintain a running bond.

F-HCHC HALF CORNER HOLLOW-CORE Face

13(330)

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE 13(330)

inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise. licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. blocks have varying texture.

shown. Actual block volumes and weights may vary. concrete density of 143 lb/ft3 (2291 kg ).

F-HCHC HALF CORNER HOLLOW-CORE

Cobble / Limestone

/ Limestone

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE 13(330)

Kingstone / Ledgestone

/ Ledgestone

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

Form Assembly Option 1 - Freestanding Form

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A082 (FS HOLLOW-CORE KIT) OR R003-A078 (HALF HOLLOWCORE KIT)

• R003-A029 (CORNER REBAR ALIGNMENT INSERT)

• R002-A095 (KNOB COVER)

NOTE: A HALF CORNER MOLD IS NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

1.

Remove flat base insert (R003-A071) and two filler plates (R003-A100) at the bottom of the form if they are installed. Remove any bolts that will interfere with the hollow-core inserts.

2.

Install the half corner mold.

3.

If connected, separate the two pieces of the hollow-core bottom insert (R003-A079 or R003-A074 and R003-A081).

4.

Remove the groove former, and install the larger portion of the hollowcore bottom insert (R003-A079 or R003-A074). Do not tighten bolts.

5.

If connected, separate the two pieces of the hollow-core top insert (R003-A080 or R003-A076 and R003-A081).

Helpful Hint: If using the half hollow-core kit the bottom insert will be part R003-A074.

6.

Remove knob formers or knob covers if installed, then install the larger portion of the hollow-core upper insert (R003-A080 or R003-A076) through the bottom knob cover holes. Install the knob cover, but do not tighten bolts.

Helpful Hint: If using the half hollow-core kit the top insert will be part R003-A076.

Helpful Hint: The upper knob former or knob cover can remain, as it will not interfere with pouring half blocks.

7.

Install the corner rebar alignment insert (R003-A029). Make sure to align the nubs on the rubber inserts with the holes in the steel inserts.

8.

Close the form. Tighten all insert bolts.

9.

Measure the width of the form opening. Ensure that the block height opening is within 18" +/- 1/16".

Production Notes

Prep

1.

Remove the corner rebar alignment inserts and spray with release agent. Spray the rest of the form with release agent.

2.

Reinstall the rubber insert, ensuring they are seated tight between both steel inserts when the form is closed. Failure to do so will result in out of tolerance blocks and/or inserts embedded in the block.

Helpful Hint: Applying oil to the contact surfaces between the rubber inserts and steel inserts, as well as the end surfaces of the rebar alignment inserts and groove forming features, will aid in proper release of the inserts and help prevent buildup of concrete between the inserts.

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

Helpful Hint: If you’re using internal vibration when pouring, adjust the method and duration for the reduced concrete volume of freestanding hollow-core blocks.

Half

Demolding

1.

Before demolding, ensure concrete has cured to proper strength. With less concrete volume, the block will crack easier if not sufficiently cured.

2.

Most commonly, manufacturers use a nylon strap to remove Freestanding Hollow-Core Half Corner blocks from the form. They wrap the strap around the center beam of concrete to move the blocks to storage.

3.

During cleaning, pay close attention to the surfaces where the rubber contacts the steel inserts.

Helpful Hint: Failure to clean these surfaces properly will prevent the rubber inserts from installing properly and cause out of tolerance blocks.

Maintenance, Tips & Tricks

Maintenance

1.

Regularly check the height measurement with the form doors closed remains 18 in +/- 1/16 in (457 mm +/- 1.5 mm). If the form is out of tolerance, adjust the inserts accordingly.

Form Assembly Option 2 - Half Freestanding Form

• RR FS HALF FORM

• R003-A078 (HALF HOLLOW-CORE KIT)

• R003-A029 (CORNER REBAR ALIGNMENT INSERT)

• R002-A095 (KNOB COVER) PARTS AND

1.

Remove flat base insert (R003-A071) and two filler plates (R003-A100) at the bottom of the form if they are installed. Remove any bolts that will interfere with the hollow-core inserts.

2.

Install the half corner mold.

R003-A074

If connected, separate the two pieces of the hollow-core bottom insert (R003-A074 and R003-A081).

4.

Remove the groove former, and install the larger portion of the hollowcore bottom insert (R003-A074). Do not tighten bolts

5.

If connected, separate the two pieces of the hollow-core top insert (R003-A076 and R003-A081).

Helpful Hint: If using the half hollow-core kit the bottom insert will be part R003-A074.

6.

Remove knob former or knob cover if installed, then install the larger portion of the hollow-core upper insert (R003-A076) through the knob cover holes. Install the knob cover, but do not tighten bolts.

Helpful Hint: If using the half hollow-core kit the top insert will be part R003-A076.

7.

Install the corner rebar alignment insert (R003-A029). Make sure to align the nubs on the rubber inserts with the holes in the steel inserts.

8.

Close the form. Tighten all insert bolts.

Helpful Hint: The upper knob former or knob cover can remain, as it will not interfere with pouring half blocks. Continued

Measure the width of the form opening. Ensure that the block height opening is within 18" +/- 1/16".

Production Notes

Prep

1.

Remove the corner rebar alignment inserts and spray with release agent. Spray the rest of the form with release agent.

2.

Reinstall the rubber insert, ensuring they are seated tight between both steel inserts when the form is closed. Failure to do so will result in out of tolerance blocks and/or inserts embedded in the block.

Helpful Hint: Applying oil to the contact surfaces between the rubber inserts and steel inserts, as well as the end surfaces of the rebar alignment inserts and groove forming features, will aid in proper release of the inserts and help prevent buildup of concrete between the inserts.

Pour

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the half corner mold.

Helpful Hint: If you’re using internal vibration when pouring, adjust the method and duration for the reduced concrete volume of freestanding hollow-core blocks.

Half

Demolding

1.

Before demolding, ensure concrete has cured to proper strength. With less concrete volume, the block will crack easier if not sufficiently cured.

2.

Most commonly, manufacturers use a nylon strap to remove Freestanding Hollow-Core Half Corner blocks from the form. They wrap the strap around the center beam of concrete to move the blocks to storage.

3.

During cleaning, pay close attention to the surfaces where the rubber contacts the steel inserts.

Helpful Hint: Failure to clean these surfaces properly will prevent the rubber inserts from installing properly and cause out of tolerance blocks.

Maintenance, Tips & Tricks

Maintenance

1.

Regularly check the height measurement with the form doors closed remains 18 in +/- 1/16 in (457 mm +/- 1.5 mm). If the form is out of tolerance, adjust the inserts accordingly.

Form Assembly Option 3 - Half Panel

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A107 (FS HALF PANEL)

• R003-A082 (FS HOLLOW-CORE KIT) OR R003-A078 (HALF HOLLOWCORE KIT)

• R003-A029 (CORNER REBAR ALIGNMENT INSERT)

• R002-A095 (KNOB COVER)

NOTE: A HALF CORNER MOLD IS NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

1.

FS HALF CORNER HC - OPT 3

Remove flat base insert (R003-A071) and two filler plates (R003-A100) at the bottom of the form if they are installed. Remove any bolts that will interfere with the hollow-core inserts.

2.

Remove one side panel, and install the half panel (R003-A107).

Half

3.

Install the half corner mold.

4.

If connected, separate the two pieces of the hollow-core bottom insert (R003-A079 or R003-A074 and R003-A081).

5.

If using the half hollow-core kit the bottom insert will be part R003-A074.

6.

If connected, separate the two pieces of the hollow-core top insert (R003-A080 or R003-A076 and R003-A081).

Helpful Hint: If using the half hollow-core kit the bottom insert will be part R003-A074.

7.

Remove knob formers or knob covers if installed, then install the larger portion of the hollow-core upper insert (R003-A080 or R003-A076) through the bottom knob cover holes. Install the knob cover, but do not tighten bolts.

Helpful Hint: If using the half hollow-core kit the top insert will be part R003-A076.

8.

Install the corner rebar alignment insert (R003-A029). Make sure to align the nubs on the rubber inserts with the holes in the steel inserts.

Helpful Hint: The upper knob former or knob cover can remain, as it will not interfere with pouring half blocks.

Continued

Close the form. Tighten all insert bolts. 10.

Measure the width of the form opening. Ensure that the block height opening is within 18" +/- 1/16".

Production Notes

Remove the corner rebar alignment inserts and spray with release agent. Spray the rest of the form with release agent.

2.

Reinstall the rubber insert, ensuring they are seated tight between both steel inserts when the form is closed. Failure to do so will result in out of tolerance blocks and/or inserts embedded in the block.

Helpful Hint: Applying oil to the contact surfaces between the rubber inserts and steel inserts, as well as the end surfaces of the rebar alignment inserts and groove forming features, will aid in proper release of the inserts and help prevent buildup of concrete between the inserts.

Pour 1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the half corner mold.

Helpful Hint: The half panel makes finishing the half blocks in a freestanding form much easier due to additional access to the block.

Helpful Hint: If you’re using internal vibration when pouring, adjust the method and duration for the reduced concrete volume of freestanding hollow-core blocks.

Half

Demolding

1.

Before demolding, ensure concrete has cured to proper strength. With less concrete volume, the block will crack easier if not sufficiently cured.

2.

Most commonly, manufacturers use a nylon strap to remove Freestanding Hollow-Core Half Corner blocks from the form. They wrap the strap around the center beam of concrete to move the blocks to storage.

3.

During cleaning, pay close attention to the surfaces where the rubber contacts the steel inserts.

Helpful Hint: Failure to clean these surfaces properly will prevent the rubber inserts from installing properly and cause out of tolerance blocks.

Maintenance, Tips & Tricks

Maintenance

1.

Regularly check the height measurement with the form doors closed remains 18 in +/- 1/16 in (457 mm +/- 1.5 mm). If the form is out of tolerance, adjust the inserts accordingly.

Tall Corner Block

FREESTANDING BLOCKS

Block Library

Freestanding 9 in (230 mm) Tall Corner blocks are used for stepping down at the end of a retaining or freestanding wall in a 9-in (230-mm) increments rather than an 18-in (457-mm) increments.

F-9SC 9" (230) STEPDOWN CORNER

Face Texture:

Cobble / Limestone Block

F-9TC 9" (230 MM) TALL CORNER

Face Texture:

Cobble / Limestone

F-9SG 9" (230) STEPDOWN GARDEN

Face Texture:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

F-90C 90 DEGREE CORNER

Face Texture:

Block Weight: Block Volume:

/ Limestone

FACE TEXTURE VARIES

24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE 23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

Cobble / Limestone

/ Ledgestone

LEDGESTONE

COBBLESTONE

Tall Corner Block

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A101 (FS GROOVE FORMER 40IN STANDARD) WITH ONE R003-A050 (FS GROOVE FORMER EXTENSION) (OPTIONAL)

• TWO R002-A095 (KNOB COVERS)

• R003-A069 (9IN TALL FS STEEL FILLER PLATE)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR TOP OF BLOCK AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

ONE FREESTANDING 9-IN (230-MM) CORNER FACE MOLD IS NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

R003-A068

Form Assembly

1.

If the flat base (R003-A071) is installed in the base of the form, it needs to be removed.

2.

If the filler plates (R003-A100) are installed in the top and bottom panels, they will need to be removed.

3.

Remove the groove former if it is installed.

Critical Note: Using the groove former in 9-in (230-mm) tall blocks will make the concrete thin and prone to cracking. Also, an alternative way to lift the block will need to be devised, as the standard lifting inserts will not work with the thin concrete.

Helpful Hint: If you want to use the groove former in the block, install the groove former extension onto the groove former. Then install the groove former with one extension onto the 9-in (230-mm) tall steel insert (R003-A068)

4.

Install the 9-in (230-mm) tall steel insert (R003-A068) into the bottom panel of the form using the groove former holes.

5.

Install the 9-in (230-mm) tall freestanding corner mold centered in the base of the form.

6.

If the knob formers are installed, remove now and install the knob covers (R002-A095).

9 in
Tall Corner Block

Production Notes

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Demolding

1.

Use a pry bar to aid in opening the forms. Do not hammer on forms.

Helpful Hint: The appropriate pry point for freestanding forms will vary depending on what generation form they are. Older forms will have a tab halfway down the side panel to use as a leverage point. Newer forms are designed with a notch towards the top of the panel for the pry bar placement.

Maintenance, Tips & Tricks

Tips

1.

Redi-Rock does not currently offer a 9 in (230 mm) Tall Half Corner block; however, if this block is needed, the form can be short-poured in the full corner configuration outlined above.

Helpful Hint: Do not allow panels to slam open hard on rails. Protecting the form from unnecessary wear and tear will help to prolong the life of your investment.

Tall Garden Block

Freestanding 9 in (230 mm) Tall Garden blocks are used for stepping down at the end of a retaining or freestanding wall in a 9-in (230-mm) increments rather than an 18-in (457-mm) increments and have a void in the top of the block for soil, plantings, or poured concrete.

F-9SG 9" (230) STEPDOWN GARDEN

Face Texture:

Cobble / Limestone

F-9TG 9" (230 MM) TALL GARDEN

Block

Block

Tall Garden Block

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A096 (9IN TALL GARDEN INSERT)

R003-A084 HALF CORNER FACE MOLD

• R003-A069 (9IN TALL FS STEEL FILLER PLATE)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR TOP OF BLOCK AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE

R003-A086 9" CORNER FACE MOLD

R003-A066 CORNER MO NOTE: ONE FREESTANDING 9-IN (230-MM) CORNER FACE MOLD IS NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

9IN TALL GARDEN

R003-A068
R003-A012
R003-A068

Form Assembly

1.

If the flat base (R003-A071) is installed in the base of the form, it needs to be removed.

2.

If the filler plates (R003-A100) are installed in the top and bottom panels, they will need to be removed.

3.

Remove the groove former if it is installed.

4.

Install the 9-in (230-mm) tall steel insert (R003-A068) into the bottom panel of the form using the groove former holes.

5.

If knob covers or knob formers are installed, remove from the form. Then install the garden insert (R003-A096) onto the top panel of the form.

6.

Install the 9-in (230-mm) tall freestanding corner mold centered in the base of the form.

Critical Note: Using the groove former in 9-in (230mm) tall blocks with a garden insert is not advised.

9 in
Tall Garden Block

Production Notes

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Demolding

1.

Use a pry bar to aid in opening the forms. Do not hammer on forms.

Helpful Hint: The appropriate pry point for freestanding forms will vary depending on what generation form they are. Older forms will have a tab halfway down the side panel to use as a leverage point. Newer forms are designed with a notch towards the top of the panel for the pry bar placement.

Maintenance, Tips & Tricks

Tips

1.

Redi-Rock does not currently offer a 9 in (230 mm) Tall Garden Half Corner block; however, if this block is needed, the form can be shortpoured in the full corner configuration outlined above.

Helpful Hint: Do not allow panels to slam open hard on rails. Protecting the form from unnecessary wear and tear will help to prolong the life of your investment.

Tall Two-Sided Block

Freestanding 9 in (230 mm) Tall Two-Sided blocks are used for adjusting the grade by 9-in (230-mm) increments rather than an 18-in (457-mm) increments when more than one block length is necessary for the grade adjustment.

R003-A068

R003-A070

R003-A048

R003-A100

F-9TT 9" (230 MM) TALL TWO-SIDED

Face Texture:

9 in
Tall
Two-Sided Block
Cobble / Limestone
Kingstone / Ledgestone

• RR FS FORM

• R003-A102 (FS FULL GROOVE FORMER 46IN) OR R003-A101 (FS GROOVE FORMER 40IN STANDARD) WITH ONE R003-A050 (FS GROOVE FORMER EXTENSION) (OPTIONAL)

• R003-A070 (FLAT BASE FOR 9IN TALL BLOCKS)

• R003-A100 (FILLER PLATES)

• TWO R002-A095 (KNOB COVERS)

• R003-A069 (9IN TALL FS STEEL FILLER PLATE)

• TWO LOOP HOLDERS (ONE FOR TOP OF BLOCK AND ONE FOR END OF BLOCK); PART NUMBERS VARY BY HOOK STYLE PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

DESCRIPTION

NOTE: TWO FREESTANDING 9-IN (230-MM) FACE MOLDS ARE NEEDED TO PRODUCE THIS BLOCK; PART NUMBERS VARY WITH TEXTURE.

Form Assembly

1.

If the standard flat base (R003-A071) is installed in the base of the form, it needs to be removed. Then install the flat base for 9-in (230-mm) tall blocks (R003-A070).

2.

If one filler plate (R003-A100) is not installed in R003-A068 and another filler plate (R003-A100) in the top panel, install them now.

3.

Remove the groove former if it is installed.

Critical Note: Using the groove former in 9-in (230-mm) tall blocks will make the concrete thin and prone to cracking. Also, an alternative way to lift the block will need to be devised, as the standard lifting inserts will not work with the thin concrete.

Helpful Hint: If you want to use the groove former in the block, install the 46-in (1168mm) groove former (R003-A102) onto the 9-in (230-mm) tall steel insert (R003-A068). If using the 40-in (1016-mm) groove former with an extension (R003-A049), make sure the extension is installed towards the top of the 9-in tall steel insert.

4.

Install the 9-in (230-mm) tall steel insert (R003-A068) into the bottom panel of the form using the groove former holes.

5.

Install the two 9-in (230-mm) tall freestanding face molds on the form, ensuring they measure 46 ⅛ in (1172 mm) from the bottom of the form to the bottom of the lip on the mold.

6.

If the knob formers are installed, remove now and install the knob covers (R002-A095).

Helpful Hint: See page 188 for more instructions on installing face molds in a freestanding form.

Production Notes

1.

Pour the concrete to the bottom lip of the mold.

2.

Install the recessed lifting insert into the end of the block and double check the level of the concrete has not come up past the bottom lip of the mold.

Demolding

1.

Use a pry bar to aid in opening the forms. Do not hammer on forms.

Helpful Hint: The appropriate pry point for freestanding forms will vary depending on what generation form they are. Older forms will have a tab halfway down the side panel to use as a leverage point. Newer forms are designed with a notch towards the top of the panel for the pry bar placement.

Helpful Hint: Do not allow panels to slam open hard on rails. Protecting the form from unnecessary wear and tear will help to prolong the life of your investment.

CAP FORMS

Cap Forms

General

Two-Sided Cap

Three-Sided Cap

Four-Sided Cap

Three-Sided Half Cap

Cap forms are used to create cap blocks that will sit atop walls. They consist of steel jackets and rubber molds to create the desired texture on two, three, or four sides of the caps plus the top.

R004-0037
R004-A016
R004-A006
R004-A012 R004-A017
R004-A018

General Production

Note: There are instructions specific to producing each Redi-Rock precast modular block throughout this manual. Please be sure to understand both the following general guidelines and the specific instructions before beginning to manufacture a Redi-Rock product.

Prep

1.

Scrape and clean any residual concrete from the steel and rubber parts of the form. Pay close attention to surfaces where the steel contacts the rubber, as concrete build-up will deform the rubber molds.

2.

Apply a thin coat of release agent to both the rubber mat and sides of the cap mold(s).

3.

Ensure the cap platform is on a flat location, and set and center the steel jackets on it.

4.

Lock the form together with the clamps.

Pour 1.

Pour the concrete into the form.

2.

Screed the concrete to the top of the form and smooth the surface.

Helpful Hint: The exposed concrete is actually the bottom of the cap and the surface on which it will sit. Having it level and flat is key to quality installation in the field.

Demolding:

Safety Note

Allow blocks to cure properly before lifting out of form. Proper cure times vary according to weather, concrete mix, and curing conditions.

1.

Roll the form using your preferred lifting device, such as a crane, forklift, skidsteer, etc., that is appropriately rated.

2.

Critical Note: Be sure to lock the lifting device onto the trunions to avoid the form sliding off the device.

Set the form down on a pallet or dunnage. Unlatch the clamps to remove the form from the block.

Helpful Hint: Some manufacturers use wood lath, dunnage, or foam between the caps to create separation for easier handling.

Two-Sided Cap

Two-Sided Caps have texture on the two long sides and top. They are used to finish off the top of retaining or freestanding walls.

A-2SC TWO-SIDED CAP

Form Assembly Option 1:

• R004-A012 (FULL FORM, INCLUDING JACKETS, MOLD, MAT AND PLATFORM)

R004-A011

Form Assembly Option 2:

PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

TO CONVERT A FOUR-SIDED FORM (R004-A018) TO A TWO-SIDED FORM YOU NEED THE FOLLOWING PARTS:

• TWO R004-A001 (STEEL END SHIMS) • TWO R004-A011-TX01 (TEXTURES)

Critical Note: Once a three- or four-sided form has been converted using this method; it is not recommended to go back to producing three- or four-sided caps.

1.

Cut all angle iron from inside of the four-sided steel jacket (R004-A016).

2.

Drill three holes on each short end of the form to allow installation of the steel end shims (R004-A001).

3.

Install steel end shims (R004-A001).

4.

Drill four holes on the long sides to allow installation of the textured rubber (R004-A0011-TX01).

5.

Install textures (R004-A0011-TX01) on long sides.

6.

Set it on the mat, and it’s ready for production.

Two-Sided Cap

Three-Sided Cap

Three-Sided Caps have texture on the three sides – two long sides and one short side – and are used to finish off the top ends of retaining or freestanding walls.

A-3SC THREE-SIDED CAP

R004-A016
R004-A006

Four-Sided Cap

Four-Sided Caps have texture on all four sides and top. They are used when there is a standalone section of wall where the texture is needed and it doesn’t abut anything. Sometimes they are used as steps or when a cap needs to be cut for a radius.

A-4SC FOUR-SIDED CAP

• R004-A018 (FULL FORM, INCLUDING JACKETS, MOLD, MAT AND PLATFORM) PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

Form Assembly

1.

Four-sided cap forms (R002-A018) are shipped ready for production.

Three-Sided Half Cap

Three-Sided Half Caps are used at the start or end of a freestanding or retaining wall to accommodate the running bond.

A-3SHC THREE-SIDED HALF CAP

Three-Sided

AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

TO CONVERT THE THREE SIDED CAP (R004-A017) OR FOUR SIDED CAP (R004-A018) FORM TO MAKE A THREE-SIDED HALF-CAP YOU WILL NEED: • R004-A057 (DIVIDER PLATE)

R004-A053

Form Assembly

1.

Install the cap divider plate (R004-A057) in the middle of the cap form (R004-A017 or R004-A018) using clamps or screws. Measure both sides to get it square.

Production Notes

When using the Four-Sided Cap Mold, two Three-Sided Caps can be poured at once because there is texture on both short ends of the form. When using a Three-Sided Cap form, only one side of the form will be poured.

Helpful Hint: The steel is cut to match the texture on the rubber mold, so it will fit better in one orientation than the other. Install properly to get the correct dimension of 24 7/16 in (621 mm).

Three-Sided
Half
Cap

STEP FORMS

Three-Sided 48 in (1219 mm) Step

Three-Sided 72 in (1829 mm)

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL1)

COMPATIBLE PLATFORM (FL2)

Step forms are used to create steps. They consist of steel jackets and rubber molds to create the desired texture on three sides – two short and one long – and the top of the steps.

R004-A054 R004-A079 R004-A087

R004-A052

R004-A048

R004-0121

R004-A080
R004-A066

General Production

Note: There are instructions specific to producing each Redi-Rock precast modular block throughout this manual. Please be sure to understand both the following general guidelines and the specific instructions before beginning to manufacture a Redi-Rock product.

Prep 1.

Ensure the form is in a flat location and level.

2.

Scrape and clean any residual concrete from the steel and rubber parts of the form. Pay close attention to surfaces where the steel contacts the rubber, as concrete build-up will deform the rubber molds.

3.

Install the long pin (R004-A050) to lock the steel back plate in place.

4.

Apply a thin coat of release agent to the rubber mold and steel back plate.

5.

Insert the lifting hook into the loop holder on the steel back plate.

6.

Lock the form closed using the rotating form locks (on form R004-A087 and R004-A079) or the pins (on form R004-A054).

Helpful Hint: When using R004-A054, also install the short pin (R004-A048) in the front of the form.

Pour the concrete into the form.

2.

Screed the concrete to the top of the form and smooth the surface.

Helpful Hint: The exposed concrete is actually the bottom of the step and the surface on which it will sit. Having it level and flat is key to quality installation in the field.

Demolding:

Safety Note

Allow steps to cure properly before lifting out of form. Proper cure times vary according to weather, concrete mix, and curing conditions.

1.

Unlatch the rotating form locks or pins to free the rubber mold from the back plate.

2.

Use the long pin (R004-A050) to pry the back plate from the concrete.

Note: If using R004-A054, also remove the short pin (R004-A048) and the three-sided rubber mold prior to lifting the block.

3.

Use the lifting hook to rotate the step 180 degrees to remove it from the form.

4.

Set the step down on a pallet or dunnage with the texture side up.

Helpful Hint: Some manufacturers use wood lath or foam between the steps to create separation for easier handling.

Three-Sided 48 in (1219 mm) Step

Three-Sided 48 in (1219 mm) Steps are used to create steps in various applications where grade changes are needed. They are textured on three sides – two short and one long – and the top.

A-3S48 THREE-SIDED STEP 48 IN

(FL1)

DESCRIPTION

Form Assembly Option 1:

R004-A089
R004-A088
R004-A089

Form Assembly Option 2:

R004-A047 LOCK BAR 1

R004-A048 RELEASE BAR 1

R004-A052

R004-A050 48" 3-SIDED STEP 7" POLYURETHANE 1

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL1)

PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION

R002-A146 A/R LOOP HOLDER TYPE #4

COMPATIBLE PLATFORM (FL2)

PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION

R004-A074 A/R STEP PLATFORM

NOTE:

Three-Sided 72 in (1829 mm) Step

Three-Sided 72 in (1829 mm) Steps are used to create steps in various applications where grade changes are needed. They are textured on three sides – two short and one long – and the top.

A-3S72 THREE-SIDED STEP 72 IN

R004-A080
R004-A066

TO CONVERT THE THREE SIDED CAP (R004-A017) OR FOUR SIDED CAP (R004-A018) FORM TO MAKE A THREE-SIDED HALF-CAP YOU WILL NEED:

R004-A080
R004-A066

COLUMN FORMS

Column Forms

The column form consists of a platform, a steel jacket, and rubber mold(s), and it’s used to produce columns which are more decorative than structural components of Redi-Rock walls.

NOTES: FL1) COMPATIBLE OPTIONS MUST BE SELECTED SEPARATELY AND ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THIS ASSEMBLY 2) MOLD AND ITS POLY INSERT ARE TO BE PLACED UPSIDE DOWN ONTO THE PLATFORM COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL1)

FL1
R004-A024
R004-A034
R004-A025

General Production

Note: There are instructions specific to producing each Redi-Rock precast modular block throughout this manual. Please be sure to understand both the following general guidelines and the specific instructions before beginning to manufacture a Redi-Rock product.

Prep 1.

Apply release agent to all surfaces.

2.

Tighten down steel form clamps.

3.

Be sure to install lifting hooks in loopholders.

4.

Check mold alignment.

Note: If using the 8 in (203 mm) center core, grease the core on the first pours or when columns will sit over the weekend before demolding. Pour 1.

Be sure to install lifting hooks in loopholders.

Helpful Hint: Place handles in rubber mold towards the bottom of the form when preparing to pour. Once the blocks are rolled over during demolding procedure, the handles will then be upright for easy demolding of the rubber off of the poured block.

Helpful Hint: Depending on your concrete mix, you may need to vibrate concrete during or after pouring to get the desired finished product.

Demolding:

Safety Note

Allow columns to cure properly before lifting out of form. Proper cure times vary according to weather, concrete mix, and curing conditions.

1.

Raise form using rollover trunions. Break loose base platform with pry bar. 2.

Raise form and gently roll over. 3.

Lower to the floor. 4.

Remove steel jackets. 5.

Raise block and rubber mold using lift hooks. 6.

Use handles on the rubber mold to spread the mold and lower it to the floor.

Critical Note: Be sure to lock the lifting device onto the trunions to avoid the form sliding off the device.

Some producers choose to palletize columns for easier storage and inventory purposes.

Helpful Hint: Blocks may be handled by lifting hooks or a Probst Lift.

A-COLS COLUMN - SOLID CORE A-CC COLUMN CAP

Block

Solid Core Column

Solid Core Columns are textured on four sides and used as decorative elements. They may have optional fence rail pockets when used in fencing applications.

A-COLS COLUMN - SOLID CORE Block

OPTIONAL FENCE POCKET

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL1) PART NUMBER QTY

R002-A146 A/R

1. Units for dimensions are inches (mm), typical unless noted otherwise. 2. Block production varies with each licensed Redi-Rock manufacturer. Confirm availability before Specifying or Ordering.

3. Actual block volumes and weights may vary.

Weights are based upon a concrete density Weight and volume ranges represents the hole size shown and with no hole.

NOTES: FL1) COMPATIBLE OPTIONS MUST BE SELECTED SEPARATELY AND ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THIS 2) MOLD AND ITS POLY INSERT ARE TO BE PLACED UPSIDE DOWN ONTO THE PLATFORM

Solid

• R004-A032 (FULL FORM)

• OPTIONAL R004-A039 OR R004-A040 - FENCE RAIL POCKET FORMERS

• OPTIONAL R004-A030 KEYWAY FOR COLUMN RAIL POCKET RUBBER INSERT PARTS AND KIT NUMBERS FOR ORDERING

COMPATIBLE OPTIONS (FL1) PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION

R002-A146 A/R Loop Holder #4

R004-A041 A/R Lifteye Former #7

FL1 LOOP HOLDER R004-A025

FL1
R004-A024
R004-A034
R004-A025

Form Assembly

1.

If pouring a Solid Core Column, the form will arrive ready to be poured.

2.

If using fence rail pockets, see illustration for how many keyways and fence rail pockets should be used for end post, line posts, and corner posts.

3.

If using the fence rail pockets with the Limestone or Cobblestone texture, the rubber inserts (R004-A039) need to be placed and locked into the rubber mold using the keyways (R004-A030). Keyways are bolted to the bottom of the platform. To attach the fence rail pockets, loosen the keyway and slide the rail pockets tight to the rubber mold, then re-tighten the keyway. Corner Post

Line Post

Helpful Hint:

The Ledgestone texture does not use keyways for attaching fence rail pockets. The fence rail pockets (R004-A040) bolt directly to the bottom of the form.

Production Notes

Demolding: 1.

If the fence rail pockets have been used, the rubber inserts will need to be removed during the demolding process. 2.

The Ledgestone fence rail pockets will need to be unbolted from the form before the block can be demolded. Then they can be tapped out with a hammer from the column while it is still inverted.

3.

The Limestone and Cobblestone inserts that use keyways can be removed by tapping with a hammer after the column is removed from the form.The keyways do not need to be unbolted from the form.

Critical Note: Be sure not to damage the threads when unbolting the fence rail pockets from the form.

ACCESSORIES (COLUMN BLOCKS)

8 in (203 mm) Core Column

Block Library

A-COL8 COLUMN - 8" (203mm) CORE Block

Columns with 8 in (203 mm) Core are textured on four sides and used as decorative elements. The center core can be used to reduce the overall weight, to run utilities or to tie the column with rebar and poured concrete to a footer or wall. It may also have optional fence rail pockets when used in fencing applications.

A-COL8 8 IN CORE COLUMN

Block Weight: 730 lb (330 kg) Block Volume: 5.1 ft³ (0.14 m³)

CENTERED THRU TAPERED HOLE 8-10 (200-250) DIAMETERS

A-COL4 COLUMN - 4" Block

CENTERED 4 (102) DIAMETER PVC PIPE SLEEVE THRU BLOCK OPTIONAL FENCE POCKET

OPTIONAL 4 (102) DIAMETER THRU CENTER HOLE

• R004-A032 (FULL FORM)

• R004-A035 (8 IN CENTER CORE)

• OPTIONAL R004-A039 OR R004-A040 - FENCE RAIL POCKET FORMERS

• OPTIONAL R004-A030 KEYWAY FOR COLUMN RAIL POCKET RUBBER INSERT

Form Assembly

1.

To install the 8 in (203 mm) tapered core into the form, use the hole in the center of the base and tighten it.

2.

If using the fence rail pockets, see instructions on page 377 for form set up.

Production Notes

Pour:

1.

Be sure to apply release agent to the center core before pouring.

Helpful Hint: Occasionally applying grease to the center core will help columns demold easier. Be sure to use if columns will cure over the weekend.

Demolding:

1.

If using the fence rail pockets, see instructions on page 378 for demolding instructions.

8 in
(203 mm)
Core Column

4 in (102 mm) Core Column

A-COL4 COLUMN - 4" (102mm) CORE

Block Weight: Block Volume:

Columns with 4 in (102mm) Core have conduit in the center of the column to facilitate running utilities. They are textured on four sides and may also have the fence rail pockets.

810 lb (370 kg)

5.6 ft3 (0.16 m3)

A-COL4 4 IN CORE COLUMN

4 (102) DIAMETER

A-CC

COLUMN CAP 2.7 ft3 (0.08 m3)

• R004-A032 (FULL FORM)

• R004-A037 (COLUMN CONDUIT RETAINER KIT)

• OPTIONAL R004-A039 OR R004-A040 - FENCE RAIL POCKET FORMERS

• OPTIONAL R004-A030 KEYWAY FOR COLUMN RAIL POCKET RUBBER INSERT

R004-A031
R004-A103

Form Assembly

1.

To install the column conduit retainer kit (R004-A037) in the form bolt the rubber retainer (R004-0082) in the center hole in the bottom of the base. The crossbar piece will be attached in preparation for pouring.

Pour concrete to here

2.

If using the fence rail pockets, see instructions on page 377 for form set up.

Production Notes

Prep:

1.

Apply release agent to all of the parts, including the cross bar.

2.

Slide approximately 17-in (432-mm) piece of PVC pipe onto the rubber retainer.

Close the form. 4.

Insert lifting hooks into the loopholders. 5.

Slide the Conduit Cross Bar Retainer into the PVC and secure using the wing nuts. Pour:

Pour the concrete and finish to the bottom edge of the mold.

Pour concrete to here

Remove the conduit cross bar from the form before demolding the column. 2.

If using the fence rail pockets, see instructions on page 378 for demolding instructions.

(102 mm)
Core Column

A-CC COLUMN CAP

lb (180 kg) Block Weight: Block Volume:

Column Cap

ft3 (0.08 m3)

Column Caps are used on top of columns to create a finished look. They have texture on four sides and the top.

A-CC COLUMN CAP

OPTIONAL 4 (102) DIAMETER

4. Weights are based upon a concrete density of 143 lb/ft ).

5. Weight and volume ranges represents the blocks with the maximum hole size shown and with no hole.

6. Optional fence rail pockets available upon request. Typical pocket size is: 2 (50) wide x 5 (130)

R004-A021 (FULL

R004-A020

R004-0028

R004-A006

Form Assembly

Production Notes

Prep: 1.

If using the Cap Conduit Retainer, be sure to apply release agent to the form and the bar that will sit atop the form. Set a 4-in (102-mm) piece of PVC centered on the rubber mat and use the conduit cap retainer to hold it in place. Pour:

Pour the concrete into the form.

2.

Screed the concrete to the top of the form and smooth the surface.

Helpful Hint: The exposed concrete is actually the bottom of the cap and the surface on which it will sit. Having it level and flat is key to quality installation in the field.

Demolding:

Safety Note

Allow blocks to cure properly before lifting out of form. Proper cure times vary according to weather, concrete mix, and curing conditions.

1.

Roll the form using your preferred lifting device, such as a crane, forklift, skidsteer, etc., that is appropriately rated.

2.

Set the form down on a pallet or dunnage. Unlatch the clamps to remove the form from the block.

Critical Note: Be sure to lock the lifting device onto the trunions to avoid the form sliding off the device.

Helpful Hint: Some manufacturers use wood lath or foam between the caps to create separation for easier handling.

TEXTURES

Limestone

Full Face Molds

R002-A085-LM01

R002-A085-LM03

R002-A193-LM01

Half Face Mold

Corner Face Molds

R003-A066- LM01

R002-A085-LM02

R002-A085-LM04

Other Available Options

R002-A187-LM01

Short Block Face Mold

R003-A084-LM01

Half Corner Mold

R003-A086-LM01 9 in (230 mm) Corner Face Mold

Kingstone

Full Face Molds

R002-A085-KS01

R002-A085-KS04

R002-A085-KS07

R002-A085-KS02

R002-A085-KS05

R002-A085-KS08

R002-A085-KS03

R002-A085-KS06

R002-A193-KS01

Half Face Mold

Corner Face Molds

R003-A066-KS01

R003-A084-KS01

Half Corner Mold

Other Available Options

R003-A086-KS01

9 in (230 mm) Corner Face Mold

Textures

Ledgestone

Full Face Molds

R002-A085-LD01

R002-A085-LD04

R002-A085-LD07

R002-A085-LD10

Corner Face Molds

R003-A066-LD01

Other Available Options

R003-A086-LD01 9 in (230 mm) Corner Face Mold

R002-A085-LD02

R002-A085-LD05

R002-A085-LD08

R002-A187-LD01 / LD02 Short Block Face Mold

R003-A066-LD02

R002-A085-LD03

R002-A085-LD06

R002-A085-LD09

R002-A193-LD01 Half Face Mold

R003-A084-LD01 Half Corner Mold

Cobblestone

Full Face Molds

R002-A085-CB01

R002-A193-CB01

Half Face Mold

Corner Face Molds

R002-A193-LD01

R002-A085-CB02

Other Available Options

R002-A187-CB01

Short Block Face Mold

R003-A084-CB01

Half Corner Mold

R003-A086-CB01 9 in (230 mm) Corner Face Mold

Textures

Smooth

Full Face Molds

SM01

Corner Face Molds

R003-A066-SM01

R002-A193-SM02

Half Face Mold

R003-A084-SM01

Half Corner Mold

Ledgestone

R001-A050-LD01

R001-A050-LD05

R001-A050-LD02

R001-A050-LD06

Cobblestone

R001-A050-CB01

R001-A050-CB02

R001-A050-LD03

R001-A050-LD07

R001-A050-LD04

R001-A050-LD08

R001-A050-CB03

R001-A050-CB04

R001-A050-LM01

R001-A050-LM02

R001-A050-KS01

R001-A050-KS02

Textures
Limestone
Kingstone

APPENDIX

18" (457 mm) HIGH RETAINING BLOCKS

Block Setback Options

Block Setback Options

The block-to-block setback available with Redi-Rock is controlled by the size and location of the shear knobs (domes) cast into the blocks. While the 10" (254 mm) diameter knob and the 1 5/8" (41 mm) setback position is the most common configuration, Redi-Rock has three different knob sizes and three different locations available.

The block-to-block setback available with Redi-Rock is controlled by the size and location of the shear knobs (domes) cast into the blocks. While the 10” (254 mm) diameter knob and the 1 5/8” (41 mm) setback position is the most common configuration, Redi-Rock has three different knob sizes and three different locations available.

Five degree (5°) setback (Standard)

Available with:

· 28" (710 mm) blocks, 41" (1030 mm) blocks, and 60" (1520 mm) blocks

· 28" (710 mm) PC blocks (shown here)

One degree (1°) setback (Specialty)

Move blocks forward during installation to engage shear knobs (Typical)

Zero (0°) setback (Specialty)

Available with:

· 28" (710 mm) blocks, 41" (1030 mm) blocks, and 60" (1520 mm) blocks · 28" (710 mm) PC blocks (shown here) and 41" (1030 mm) PC blocks

Move blocks forward during installation to engage shear knobs (Typical)

Block Setback Options

Redi-Rock has two options for large batter retaining walls. Both options are created by relocating the knob so that it is further back in the RediRock blocks compared to our smaller batter walls (5° and less). There are two knob locations further back in the block which create the 9” (230 mm) setback block and the planter block. Blocks made with knobs in either of these locations almost exclusively use 10” (254 mm) diameter knobs.

Redi-Rock has two options for large batter retaining walls. Both options are created by relocating the knob so that it is further back in the Redi-Rock blocks compared to our smaller batter walls (5° and less). There are two knob locations further back in the block which create the 9" (230 mm) setback block and the planter block. Blocks made with knobs in either of these locations almost exclusively use 10" (254 mm) diameter knobs.

9" (230 mm) Setback Blocks

Move blocks forward during installation to engage shear knobs (Typical) Setback = 9 3 8" (238 mm) (27.5° batter angle on

Available with: · 41" (1030 mm) blocks (shown here) and 60" (1520 mm) blocks · Not available in PC blocks

Planter Blocks

Move blocks forward during installation to engage shear knobs (Typical)

36" (914 mm) HIGH RETAINING BLOCKS

Block Setback

The block-to-block setback available with 36" (914 mm) high RediRock XL hollow-core retaining blocks is controlled by the location of the shear knobs cast into the blocks. The 3 1/4" (83 mm) setback between courses creates a 5° batter angle on the back of the wall which is consistent with the batter angle created by 18" (457 mm) high RediRock blocks with 10" (254 mm) shear knobs.

The block-to-block setback available with 36" (914 mm) high Redi-Rock XL hollow-core retaining blocks is controlled by the location of the shear knobs cast into the blocks. The 3 1/4" (83 mm) setback between courses creates a 5° batter angle on the back of the wall which is consistent with the batter angle created by 18" (457 mm) high Redi-Rock blocks with 10" (254 mm) shear knobs.

36" (914 mm) High XL Hollow-Core Retaining Blocks

5 8" (422 mm)

4" (102 mm)

10" (254 mm) shear knob

Setback = 314" (83 mm) (5° Batter Angle on Wall)

(914 mm)

7" (178 mm)

3 8" (340 mm)

The relative knob and groove configuration, and resulting setback, are consistent between the 52" (1320 mm), 72" (1830 mm), and 96" (2440 mm) XL hollow-core retaining blocks.

Move blocks forward during installation to engage shear knobs (typical)

36"
Face Textured

1-AT Geogrid Connection

The 1-AT geogrid connection is a legacy component of the Redi-Rock system.

The 1-AT geogrid connection relies on a sheet of geogrid wrapping around a 7/16 in x 40 in (1.6 mm x 1016 mm) fiberglass rod that is placed in the groove of a 1-AT block. Another block is then placed on top of it to sandwich the geogrid and rod between the two blocks. A minimum of 3 feet (915 mm) of anchored tail is required, and the main reinforcement length of geogrid will be determined by the design.

Reach out to Redi-Rock for more information on purchasing fiberglass rods for use in walls that are utilizing the 1-AT blocks and geogrid connection.

Loop Holders & Lifteye Formers

Redi-Rock offers a number of different options to hold lifting inserts when pouring Redi-Rock blocks. While inserts made from galvanized, A36 steel are the most common type utilized, options are also available for 5/16-in (8-mm) steel cable and 1/2-in (13-mm) rebar.

Loop Holders - 3/8 in Steel Lifting Inserts

Please specify which hook you are using at the time of your order.

The following loop holders are sized to hold a 3/8-in (9.5-mm) solid loop with a maximum outside diameter bend in the top of the insert of 2 1⁄2 in to 2 5/8 in (63.5 mm to 66.7 mm). Commercially available lifting inserts are offered by a number of manufacturers, and Redi-Rock producers have elected to use a variety of lifting inserts to safely handle Redi-Rock blocks. Two examples are below.

Manufactured by: American Step Company https://www.americanstep.com/ 830 East Broadway PO Box 137 Griffen, GA 30224-0137

Manufactured by: A.L. Patterson https://www.alpsupply.com/ (800) 332-7090 300 Ben Fairless Drive Fairless Hills, PA 19030

3/8” Solid Loop Lifter
3/8” R Anchor

Loop Holder #1

R002-A108-AST and R002-A108-ALP

Loop Holder #1 is used on the door panels of most Redi-Rock forms.

Loop Holder #2

R002-A110-AST and R002-A110-ALP

Loop Holder #2 is installed in the 10-in (254-mm) diameter knobs and is primarily used in half blocks.

Loop Holder #3

R002-A154-AST and R002-A154-ALP

Loop Holder #3 is typically placed in the exposed concrete on the top end of freestanding and retaining forms when a recessed hook is desired. (Note: This is the same part as Loop Holder #1 with a steel bar for prying.)

Loop Holder #4

R002-A146

Loop Holder #4 is typically used in column blocks.

Loop Holder #5

R002-A105-AST and R002-A105-ALP

Loop Holder #5 is typically used on retaining top blocks, retaining 41 in (1030 mm) hollow-core blocks, retaining planter blocks, and freestanding garden blocks where a recess is not desired. The loop holder is mounted on the inside of the form insert and is only accessible when the form insert is removed. A slot is notched in the insert to allow the solid loop to be inserted into the holder. (Note: existing form inserts can be modified to use Loop Holder #5 by cutting a slot and drilling new bolt holes as needed.)

Loop Holder #6

Loop Holder #6 is used within 6-in (152-mm) knob formers.

Loop Holders - 1/2 in or 7/16 in Steel Lifting Inserts

Please specify which hook you are using at the time of your order.

The following loop holders are sized to hold a 1/2 in (13 mm) or 7/16 in (11 mm) solid loop. Commercially available lifting inserts are offered by a number of manufacturers, and Redi-Rock producers have elected to use a variety of lifting inserts to safely handle Redi-Rock blocks. Two examples are below.

1/2" Solid Loop Lifter 7/16" R Anchor

Manufactured by: American Step Company americanstep.com

Item Number: 500-975"

1 / 2

Description: Solid Loop Lifter, Ø1/2" X 9 3/4", A36 Steel, Epoxy coated per ASTM A 934

Manufactured by: A.L. Patterson

Website: alpsupply.com

Item Number: LRA7169G

Description: R-Anchor, Ø 7/16" X 9", Hot Dip Galvanized

Loop

Loop Holders - Steel Cable

A few loop holders are also made in a variation to accommodate 5/16in (8-mm) steel cable.

Loop Holder #7

Loop Holder #7 is used on the door panels of most Redi-Rock forms.

Loop Holder #2

R002-A110-CLP

ALPATTERSON 3/8" DIA LIFT HOOK

AMERICAN STEP 3/8" DIA LIFT HOOK

Loop Holder #2 is installed in the 10-in (254-mm) diameter knobs and is primarily used in half blocks.

Polytek

Loop Holder #8

R002-A200-CLP

Loop Holder #8 is typically placed in the exposed concrete on the top end of freestanding and retaining forms when a recessed hook is desired. (Note: This is the same part as Loop Holder #7 with a steel bar for prying.)

Lifteye Formers - Steel Bar

Lifteye formers are available for manufacturers using 1/2-in (13-mm) steel bar as lifting inserts.

Lifteye Former #1

R002-A155

Used for most retaining and freestanding blocks.

Lifteye Former #2

Used for retaining planter blocks.

Lifteye Former #4

R002-A162

Lifteye Former #4 is installed in the 10-in (254-mm) diameter knobs and is primarily used in half blocks.

Lifteye Former #5

R002-A150

Lifteye Former #5 is typically placed in the exposed concrete on the top end of freestanding and retaining forms when a recessed hook is desired.

Lifteye Former #6

R002-A151

Used for 6-in (152-mm) diameter knob formers.

Lifteye Former #7

R002-A196

Used for the step form.

POLYURETHANE - SIDE 1 Lifteye Former #8

R004-A041

Used for column knob formers.

Lifting Load Safety Sheet

Do you know the load you are applying to your lifters and chains? This chart demonstrates the load multipliers and loads at varying degrees of rigging. A shallow angle between the two lifters can actually apply a load greater than the structure being lifted. Angle

A & B Load Multiplier

Angle A Angle B
Block C
Block C in this example = 3,400 pounds

In this example the load multiplier is 1.138 which make the lifters carry a load of 1,936 lbs. per lifter.

C in this example = 3,400 pounds

Lifter
Lifter
Block C
Block

XL Rebar Cages

All Redi-Rock XL Hollow-Core Retaining blocks, including R-5236HC, R-7236HC, and R-9636HC, require steel reinforcement cages. This is a safety critical requirement to protect against crack propagation transferring through thin-walled sections of the precast modular blocks (PMBs).

Follow the specifications below for constructing reinforcement cages. All rebar used for constructing reinforcement cages in Redi-Rock XL blocks is #4 (½ inch) grade 60 minimum and must meet ASTM A615. All rebar intersections must be tied.

The plastic bar wheels used are 3-in (75-mm) cover (ALP-PWWB3 or equivalent) and 2-in (50-mm) cover (ALP-PWWB2 or equivalent).

See the following pages for reinforcement details.

RETAINING BLOCKS

Plastic Bar Wheels

Reinforcing Steel

8, 2-in (50-mm) cover 4, 3-in (75-mm) cover

R-9636HC 96" (2,440 mm) Hollow Core Retaining Block

8, 2-in (50-mm) cover 4, 3-in (75-mm) cover

8, 2-in (50-mm) cover 4, 3-in (75-mm) cover

Recommended Tools: Jig fixture (see page xxix in the Appendix for design), rebar tie wire tool

CRITICAL NOTE: All 32-in (812.8 mm) cut length bars must be inside the stirrups. Bars attached to the outside of the frame will significantly reduce the strength of the PMBs.

Construction of Reinforcement Cage for R-9636HC

Put the two stirrups on the channels of the jig fixture.

Place two cut length bars on each end of the jig fixture. Tie all bar intersections as needed.

Slide remaining internal cut length bars into jig inside stirrups. Tie all bar intersections as needed.

Tie cut length rebar crosses at the top and bottom of the cage. The intersection of the two sticks should be centered between the stirrups.

Attach required spacers and position per drawing.

6.

Remove completed reinforcement cage from the jig fixture.

Reinforcing Steel

BLOCKS

R-5236HC 52" (1,320 mm) Hollow Core Retaining Block

Reinforcing Steel

Reinforcing Steel

R-5236HC 52" (1,320 mm) Hollow Core Retaining Block

SCHEDULE

bars #4, ASTM A615 Grade 60 (13 mm, 420 mPa)

*All bars #4, ASTM A615 Grade 60 (13 mm, 420 mPa)

VIEW

Reinforcing Steel

R-5236HC 52" (1,320 mm) Hollow Core Retaining Block

43 1/2" (1105 mm)

Min. Bend Radius

1/4" (666 mm)

#4 vertical bars, 32" (813 mm) long, all inside cage (typ. of 6)

(508 mm)

(813 mm)

1/2" (394 mm)

5/8" (676 mm)

3/8" (568 mm)

#4 bent hoop, bent as shown (typ. of 2) (continuous bar, overlap 12" (305 mm) min., back end)

6" (150 mm) dia. rebar spacer (typ. of 4) TOP VIEW FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW BACK VIEW

4" (100 mm) dia. rebar spacer (typ. of 8)

Notes:

1. All bar shall comply with ASTM A615, Grade 60 (13 mm, 420 MPa).

2. Tie all bar intersections.

3. Maintain concrete cover of no less than 1 inch (25 mm) over all reinforcing steel. Actual cover varies. Min. Cover 1 3 4" (44 mm)

(457 mm)

(178 mm)

#4 diagonal bars, 32" (813 mm) long (typ. of 2) (crossed, inside cage) 7" (178 mm)

#4 diagonal bars, 32" (813 mm) long (typ. of 2) (crossed, inside cage)

Reinforcing Steel

R-7236HC 72" (1,830 mm) Hollow Core Retaining Block

DIMENSIONS

*All bars #4, ASTM A615 Grade 60 (13 mm, 420 mPa)

Reinforcing Steel

R-7236HC 72" (1,830 mm) Hollow Core Retaining Block

Min. Bend Radius

1/4" (666 mm)

Min. Cover

1 3 8" (35 mm)

#4 vertical bars, 32" (813 mm) long, all inside cage (typ. of 8)

#4 bent hoop, bent as shown (typ. of 2) (continuous bar, overlap 12" (305 mm) min., back end)

6" (150 mm) dia. rebar spacer (typ. of 4) TOP VIEW FRONT VIEW

4" (100 mm) dia. rebar spacer (typ. of 8)

#4 diagonal bars, 32" (813 mm) long (typ. of 2) (crossed, inside cage)

(178 mm)

#4 diagonal bars, 32" (813 mm) long (typ. of 2) (crossed, inside cage)

Notes:

1. All bar shall comply with ASTM A615, Grade 60 (13 mm, 420 MPa).

2. Tie all bar intersections.

3. Maintain concrete cover of no less than 1 inch (25 mm) over all reinforcing steel. Actual cover varies.

Reinforcing Steel

R-9636HC 96" (2,440 mm) Hollow Core Retaining Block

BAR SCHEDULE

DIMENSIONS

*All bars #4, ASTM A615 Grade 60 (13 mm, 420 mPa)

Reinforcing Steel

R-9636HC 96" (2,440 mm) Hollow Core Retaining Block

1/4" (666 mm)

#4 bent hoop, bent as shown (typ. of 2) (continuous bar, overlap 12" (305 mm) min., back end)

5/8" (450 mm)

#4 vertical bars, 32" (813 mm) long, all inside cage (typ. of 10)

6" (150 mm) dia. rebar spacer (typ. of 4)

4" (100 mm) dia. rebar spacer (typ. of 8)

#4 diagonal bars, 32" (813 mm) long (typ. of 2) (crossed, inside cage)

#4 diagonal bars, 32" (813 mm) long (typ. of 2) (crossed, inside cage)

Notes:

1. All bar shall comply with ASTM A615, Grade 60 (13 mm, 420 MPa).

2. Tie all bar intersections.

3. Maintain concrete cover of no less than 1 inch (25 mm) over all reinforcing steel. Actual cover varies.

Jig Fixture for Reinforcing Steel Cage

R001-A170
R001-A170

Tools for Demolding Freestanding Blocks

Reach out to your business consultant for more information on the following tools used to facilitate demolding freestanding blocks.

Air Stripper

The freestanding air stripper is used to ease the demolding of Freestanding Straight Top, Middle, or Bottom blocks.

AIR STRIPPER MATES WITH 2XX SLOTS ON DOOR STIFFENERS

AIR STRIPPER MATES WITH 2X SLOTS ON DOOR STIFFENERS

Spreader Lever

The freestanding spreader lever is used to keep the form doors open when lifting corner and half corner blocks out of the form.

J-Bolts and Clips

J-bolts and clips are commonly used in freestanding force protection applications to connect the blocks together as specified by an engineer.

J-Bolts and Clips

12-in (305-mm) J-bolt, Clip & Nut Kit

R003-A123

The 12-in (305-mm) j-bolt is most commonly used. It connects freestanding blocks to each other or to standard retaining blocks.

J-BOLT, CLIP, AND NUT KI

16-in (406-mm) J-bolt, Clip & Nut Kit

R003-A124

The 16-in (406-mm) j-bolt is used when connecting a freestanding block to a Positive Connection (PC) block. The extra length helps accommodate the different lifting hook placement in a PC block.

PRODUCT DATA SHEETS

Product Data Sheets

Redi-Rock 28" (710mm) Retaining Blocks

Redi-Rock 28" (710 mm) Retaining Blocks

The Redi-Rock 28” (710mm) Retaining wall blocks are machine-placed, wet-cast, precast modular block units manufactured from first-purpose, non-reconstituted concrete and intended for use in the construction of dry-stacked modular retaining wall systems. The block units are manufactured from structural-grade concrete mixes in accordance with ASTM C94 or ASTM C685 that produce a finished unit with excellent resistance to freeze-thaw, deicing chemical exposure, and submerged conditions in both fresh water and salt water applications. All Redi-Rock Retaining wall products are manufactured and distributed through an international network of individually-owned, licensed precast concrete manufacturers.

DIMENSIONAL PROPERTIES

DIMENSIONS (1)

HEIGHT (FRONT OF BLOCK)

HEIGHT (BACK OF BLOCK)

LENGTH (FRONT OF BLOCK) LENGTH (BACK OF BLOCK)

CONCRETE VOLUME

SHIPPING/HANDLING WEIGHT (2)

(1) All dimensions are inches (mm) (2) Weight shown is based on an assumed concrete unit weight of 143 lb/ft 3 (2291 kg/m3). Actual weights will vary.

CONCRETE MIX PROPERTIES (2)

FREEZE THAW EXPOSURE

(3) Concrete mix properties are in general accordance with ACI 318 durability requirements. Research has shown that concrete manufactured to these standards demonstrates good durability and performance. When these requirements are followed, specific freeze-thaw testing of the concrete is typically NOT required.

(4) Exposure class is as described in ACI 318. “MODERATE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and occasional exposure to moisture. “SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture. “VERY SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture and exposed to deicing chemicals. Exposure class should be specified by owner/purchaser prior to order placement. Longer lead times may be required for block units manufactured for “severe” and “very severe” exposure classes.

(5) Test method ASTM C39.

(6) Defined in ASTM C33 Table 3 Limits for Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements of Coarse Aggregate for Concrete.

(7) Test method ASTM C231.

(8) Test method ASTM C1218 at age between 28 and 42 days.

(9) The total cementitious material also includes ASTM C150, C595, C845, and C1157 cement. The maximum percentages shall include:

(a) Fly ash or other pozzolans in type IP, blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(b) Slag used in the manufacture of an IS blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(c) Silica fume, ASTM C1240, present in a blended cement.

(10) Fly ash or other pozzolans and silica fume shall constitute no more than 25 and 10 percent, respectively, of the

weight of the cementitious materials. TOTAL OF FLY ASH OR OTHER POZZOLANS AND SILICA FUME (10)

Redi-Rock 28" (710mm) Retaining Blocks

Redi-Rock 28" (710 mm) Retaining Blocks

DESIGN PROPERTIES

HORIZONTAL SETBACK / WALL FACE BATTER OPTIONS

10 inch (254 mm) KNOB

7 1 2 inch (190 mm) KNOB

6 3 4 inch (171 mm) KNOB

(12)

1 5 8 inch (41 mm) PER BLOCK COURSE (5.2° BATTER)

8 inch (10 mm) PER BLOCK COURSE (1.2° BATTER)

SETBACK (NO BATTER) (11)

INFILLED UNIT WEIGHT FOR WALL STABILITY CALCULATIONS (13)

LIMESTONE / COBBLESTONE BLOCKS

LEDGESTONE BLOCKS

MINIMUM CONSTRUCTION RADIUS (14)

CONCAVE CURVE

CONVEX CURVE

(11) Special consideration should be given to the design of vertical retaining walls subject to active lateral earth pressure. (12) Values based on full scale testing performed in October 2011. Copies of the full test reports are available at www.redi-rock.com. (13) The infilled unit weights shown here are based on an assumed concrete unit weight of 143 lb/ft3 (2291 kg/m3) and an assumed soil unit weight of 100 lb/ft3 (1602 kN/m3). They are reference values. Several factors can cause the unit weights of both concrete and infill soil to vary. The designer should use sound engineering judgement when assigning an infilled unit weight value for analysis. (14) The minimum construction radius stated is applicable to both concave and convex curved retaining wall sections. Increases to this minimum radius are required to account for wall batter. Special consideration should be given to block selection, facing batter, and wall height when selecting the minimum radius for the final wall alignment.

HEIGHT (FRONT)

LENGTH (FRONT)

LENGTH (BACK)

HEIGHT (BACK)

WIDTH (FORM LINE TO BACK) WIDTH (FACE TEXTURE)

HEIGHT (FRONT)

LENGTH (FRONT)

LENGTH (BACK)

HEIGHT (BACK)

WIDTH (FORM LINE TO BACK)

Redi-Rock 41" (1030mm) Retaining Blocks

Redi-Rock 41" (1030 mm) Retaining Blocks

The Redi-Rock 41” (1030mm) Retaining wall blocks are machine-placed, wet-cast, precast modular block units manufactured from first-purpose, non-reconstituted concrete and intended for use in the construction of dry-stacked modular retaining wall systems. The block units are manufactured from structural-grade concrete mixes in accordance with ASTM C94 or ASTM C685 that produce a finished unit with excellent resistance to freeze-thaw, deicing chemical exposure, and submerged conditions in both fresh water and salt water applications. All Redi-Rock Retaining wall products are manufactured and distributed through an international network of individually-owned, licensed precast concrete manufacturers.

DIMENSIONAL PROPERTIES

DIMENSIONS (1)

HEIGHT (FRONT OF BLOCK)

HEIGHT (BACK OF BLOCK)

LENGTH (FRONT OF BLOCK)

LENGTH (BACK OF BLOCK)

18 ± 3 16 (457 ± 5)

13 ± 3 16 (330 ± 5)

HALF TOP

18 ± 3 16 (457 ± 5)

13 ± 3 16 (330 ± 5)

LIMESTONE/COBBLESTONE FACE

FACE CONCRETE VOLUME

SHIPPING/HANDLING WEIGHT (2)

LIMESTONE/COBBLESTONE FACE

LEDGESTONE FACE

(1) All dimensions are inches (mm)

±12.22 ft3 (0.346 m3)

±11.73 ft3 (0.332 m3)

± 1748 lb (793 kg)

± 1677 lb (760 kg)

± 2368 lb (1074 kg) ± 2237 lb (1015 kg)

HALF MIDDLE

±5.38 ft3 (0.15 m3)

±5.14 ft3 (0.15 m3)

HALF MIDDLE

± 770 lb (350 kg)

± 735 lb (333 kg)

(2) Weight shown is based on an assumed concrete unit weight of 143 lb/ft 3 (2291 kg/m3). Actual weights will vary.

CONCRETE MIX PROPERTIES

(3)

WATER-SOLUBLE CHLORIDE ION (Cl -) CONTENT IN CONCRETE, PERCENT BY WEIGHT OF CEMENT (8)

CHLORIDE

ft3 (0.202 m3) ±6.90 ft3 (0.195 m3)

± 1022 lb (463 kg) ± 987 lb (448 kg)

ALKALI-AGGREGATE REACTIVITY MITIGATION PER ACI 201

(3) Concrete mix properties are in general accordance with ACI 318 durability requirements. Research has shown that concrete manufactured to these standards demonstrates good durability and performance. When these requirements are followed, specific freeze-thaw testing of the concrete is typically NOT required.

(4) Exposure class is as described in ACI 318. “MODERATE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and occasional exposure to moisture. “SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture. “VERY SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture and exposed to deicing chemicals. Exposure class should be specified by owner/purchaser prior to order placement. Longer lead times may be required for block units manufactured for “severe” and “very severe” exposure classes.

(5) Test method ASTM C39.

(6) Defined in ASTM C33 Table 3 Limits for Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements of Coarse Aggregate for Concrete

(7) Test method ASTM C231.

(8) Test method ASTM C1218 at age between 28 and 42 days.

(9) The total cementitious material also includes ASTM C150, C595, C845, and C1157 cement. The maximum percentages shall include:

(a) Fly ash or other pozzolans in type IP, blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(b) Slag used in the manufacture of an IS blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(c) Silica fume, ASTM C1240, present in a blended cement.

(10) Fly ash or other pozzolans and silica fume shall constitute no more than 25 and 10 percent, respectively, of the total weight of the cementitious materials.

(11) Prescriptive limits shown may be waived for concrete mixes that demonstrate excellent freeze/thaw durability in a detailed and current testing program. TOTAL

Redi-Rock 41" (1030mm) Retaining Blocks

Redi-Rock 41" (1030 mm) Retaining Blocks

DESIGN PROPERTIES

HORIZONTAL SETBACK / WALL FACE BATTER OPTIONS

10 inch (254 mm)

7 1 2 inch (190 mm) KNOB

INFILLED UNIT WEIGHT FOR WALL STABILITY CALCULATIONS (14)

LIMESTONE / COBBLESTONE BLOCKS

LEDGESTONE BLOCKS

MINIMUM CONSTRUCTION RADIUS (15)

CONCAVE CURVE

CONVEX CURVE

(12) Special consideration should be given to the design of vertical retaining walls subject to active lateral earth pressure. (13) Values based on full scale testing performed in October 2011. Copies of the full test reports are available at www.redi-rock.com. (14) The infilled unit weights shown here are based on an assumed concrete unit weight of 143 lb/ft3 (2291 kg/m3) and an assumed soil unit weight of 100 lb/ft3 (1602 kg/m3). They are reference values. Several factors can cause the unit weights of both concrete and infill soil to vary. The designer should use sound engineering judgement when assigning an infilled unit weight value for analysis. (15) The minimum construction radius stated is applicable to both concave and convex curved retaining wall sections. Increases to this minimum radius are required to account for wall batter. Special consideration should be given to block selection, facing batter, and wall height when selecting the minimum radius for the final wall alignment.

LENGTH(BACK)

HEIGHT (FRONT)

LENGTH(FRONT)

WIDTH (FACE TEXTURE)

WIDTH(FORM LINETOBACK)

LENGTH(FRONT)

(BACK) (BACK)LENGTH

HEIGHT (FRONT) WIDTH(FORM LINETOBACK)

WIDTH (FACE TEXTURE)

Redi-Rock 41" (1030mm) & 28" (710mm) Positive Connection (PC) Retaining Blocks

Redi-Rock 28" (710 mm) & 41" (1030 mm) Positive Connection (PC) Retaining Blocks

The Redi-Rock 28” (710mm) & 41" (1030mm) Positive Connection retaining wall blocks are machine-placed, wet-cast, precast modular block units manufactured from first-purpose, non-reconstituted concrete and intended for constructing dry-stacked modular retaining wall systems. The block units are manufactured from structural-grade concrete mixes in accordance with ASTM C94 or ASTM C685 that produce a finished unit with excellent resistance to freeze-thaw, deicing chemical exposure, and submerged conditions in both fresh water and salt water applications. All Redi-Rock Retaining wall products are manufactured and distributed through an international network of individually-owned, licensed precast concrete manufacturers.

DIMENSIONAL

PROPERTIES

DIMENSIONS (1)

HEIGHT (FRONT OF BLOCK)

HEIGHT (BACK OF BLOCK)

LENGTH (FRONT OF BLOCK)

LENGTH (BACK OF BLOCK)

CONCRETE

LIMESTONE/COBBLESTONE FACE

LEDGESTONE FACE

SHIPPING/HANDLING WEIGHT (2)

LIMESTONE/COBBLESTONE FACE

MIDDLE - 28" (710)

BOTTOM - 28" (710)

- 41" (1030) TOP - 41" (1030)

TOP - 28" (710) BOTTOM - 41" (1030)

TOP - 28" (710)

MIDDLE - 28" (710)

BOTTOM - 28" (710)

TOP - 41" (1030)

MIDDLE - 41" (1030)

LEDGESTONE FACE ± 1096 lb (497 kg) ± 1551 lb (703 kg) ± 1447 lb (656 kg)

(1) All dimensions are inches (mm)

(2) Weight shown is based on an assumed concrete unit weight of 143 lb/ft 3 (2291 kg/m3). Actual weights will vary.

CONCRETE MIX PROPERTIES (3)

MAXIMUM PERCENTAGE OF TOTAL CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS BY WEIGHT (9, 11) (VERY SEVERE EXPOSURE CLASS ONLY)

TOTAL OF FLY ASH OR OTHER POZZOLANS AND SILICA FUME (10)

ALKALI-AGGREGATE REACTIVITY MITIGATION PER ACI 201

(3) Concrete mix properties are in general accordance with ACI 318 durability requirements. Research has shown that concrete manufactured to these standards demonstrates good durability and performance. When these requirements are followed, specific freeze-thaw testing of the concrete is typically NOT required.

(4) Exposure class is as described in ACI 318. “MODERATE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and occasional exposure to moisture. “SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture. “VERY SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture and exposed to deicing chemicals. Exposure class should be specified by owner/purchaser prior to order placement. Longer lead times may be required for block units manufactured for “severe” and “very severe” exposure classes.

(5) Test method ASTM C39.

(6) Defined in ASTM C33 Table 3 Limits for Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements of Coarse Aggregate for Concrete.

(7) Test method ASTM C231.

(8) Test method ASTM C1218 at age between 28 and 42 days.

(9) The total cementitious material also includes ASTM C150, C595, C845, and C1157 cement. The maximum percentages shall include:

(a) Fly ash or other pozzolans in type IP, blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(b) Slag used in the manufacture of an IS blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(c) Silica fume, ASTM C1240, present in a blended cement.

(10) Fly ash or other pozzolans and silica fume shall constitute no more than 25 and 10 percent, respectively, of the total weight of the cementitious materials.

(11) Prescriptive limits shown may be waived for concrete mixes that demonstrate excellent freeze/thaw durability in a detailed and current testing program.

Redi-Rock 41" (1030mm) & 28" (710mm) Positive Connection (PC) Retaining Blocks

Redi-Rock 28" (710 mm) & 41" (1030 mm) Positive Connection (PC) Retaining Blocks

DESIGN PROPERTIES

HORIZONTAL SETBACK / WALL FACE BATTER OPTIONS

10 inch (254 mm) KNOB

7 1 2 inch (190 mm) KNOB

6 3 4

INFILLED UNIT WEIGHT FOR WALL STABILITY CALCULATIONS (14)

LIMESTONE / COBBLESTONE BLOCKS

LEDGESTONE BLOCKS

MINIMUM CONSTRUCTION RADIUS (15)

CONCAVE CURVE

CONVEX CURVE

(12) Special consideration should be given to the design of vertical retaining walls subject to active lateral earth pressure.

(13) Values based on full scale testing performed in October 2011. Copies of the full test reports are available at www.redi-rock.com.

(14) The infilled unit weights shown here are based on an assumed concrete unit weight of 143 lb/ft 3 (2291 kg/m 3) and an assumed soil unit weight of 100 lb/ft 3 (1602 kg/m 3). They are reference values. Several factors can cause the unit weights of both concrete and infill soil to vary. The designer should use sound engineering judgement when assigning an infilled unit weight value for analysis.

(15) The minimum construction radius stated is applicable to both concave and convex curved retaining wall sections. Increases to this minimum radius are required to account for wall batter. Special consideration should be given to block selection, facing batter, and wall height when selecting the minimum radius for the final wall alignment.

LENGTH(BACK)

HEIGHT (FRONT)

LENGTH(FRONT)

WIDTH(FORM LINETOBACK) WIDTH (FACE TEXTURE)

LENGTH(BACK)

LENGTH(FRONT) HEIGHT (FRONT)

WIDTH(FORM LINETOBACK) WIDTH (FACE TEXTURE)

Redi-Rock 60" (1520mm) Retaining Blocks

Redi-Rock 60" (1520 mm) Retaining Blocks

The Redi-Rock 60” (1520mm) Retaining wall blocks are machine-placed, wet-cast, precast modular block units manufactured from first-purpose, non-reconstituted concrete and intended for constructing dry-stacked modular retaining wall systems. The block units are manufactured from structural-grade concrete mixes in accordance with ASTM C94 or ASTM C685 that produce a finished unit with excellent resistance to freeze-thaw, deicing chemical exposure, and submerged conditions in both fresh water and salt water applications. All Redi-Rock Retaining wall products are manufactured and distributed through an international network of individually-owned, licensed precast concrete manufacturers.

DIMENSIONAL PROPERTIES

DIMENSIONS (1)

HEIGHT (FRONT OF BLOCK)

(BACK OF BLOCK)

LENGTH (FRONT OF BLOCK)

LENGTH (BACK OF BLOCK)

SHIPPING/HANDLING WEIGHT (2)

LIMESTONE/COBBLESTONE FACE LEDGESTONE FACE

MIDDLE BOTTOM

3216 lb (1458 kg)

3346 lb (1518 kg)

1364 lb (618 kg) ± 9.34 ft3 (0.264 m3) ± 9.09 ft3 (0.258 m3) ±1335 lb (606 kg) ± 1300 lb (590 kg)

HALF MIDDLE HALF BOTTOM

1397 lb (633 kg)

(1) All dimensions are inches (mm) (2) Weight shown is based on an assumed concrete unit weight of 143 lb/ft 3 (2291 kg/m3). Actual weights will vary.

CONCRETE MIX PROPERTIES (3)

MAXIMUM WATER-SOLUBLE CHLORIDE ION (Cl -) CONTENT IN CONCRETE, PERCENT BY WEIGHT OF CEMENT (8)

MAXIMUM PERCENTAGE OF TOTAL CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS BY WEIGHT (9, 11) (VERY SEVERE EXPOSURE CLASS ONLY)

ALKALI-AGGREGATE REACTIVITY MITIGATION PER ACI 201

(3) Concrete mix properties are in general accordance with ACI 318 durability requirements. Research has shown that concrete manufactured to these standards demonstrates good durability and performance. When these requirements are followed, specific freeze-thaw testing of the concrete is typically NOT required.

(4) Exposure class is as described in ACI 318. “MODERATE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and occasional exposure to moisture. “SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture. “VERY SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture and exposed to deicing chemicals. Exposure class should be specified by owner/purchaser prior to order placement. Longer lead times may be required for block units manufactured for “severe” and “very severe” exposure classes.

(5) Test method ASTM C39.

(6) Defined in ASTM C33 Table 3 Limits for Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements of Coarse Aggregate for Concrete.

(7) Test method ASTM C231.

(8) Test method ASTM C1218 at age between 28 and 42 days.

(9) The total cementitious material also includes ASTM C150, C595, C845, and C1157 cement. The maximum percentages shall include:

(a) Fly ash or other pozzolans in type IP, blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(b) Slag used in the manufacture of an IS blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(c) Silica fume, ASTM C1240, present in a blended cement.

(10) Fly ash or other pozzolans and silica fume shall constitute no more than 25 and 10 percent, respectively, of the total weight of the cementitious materials.

(11) Prescriptive limits shown may be waived for concrete mixes that demonstrate excellent freeze/thaw durability in a detailed and current testing program.

TOTAL OF FLY ASH OR OTHER POZZOLANS AND SILICA FUME (10)

Redi-Rock 60" (1520 mm) Retaining Blocks

Redi-Rock 60" (1520mm) Retaining Blocks

DESIGN PROPERTIES

HORIZONTAL SETBACK / WALL FACE BATTER OPTIONS

10 inch (254 mm) KNOB

7 1 2 inch (190 mm) KNOB

INFILLED UNIT WEIGHT FOR WALL STABILITY CALCULATIONS (14)

LIMESTONE / COBBLESTONE BLOCKS

LEDGESTONE BLOCKS

MINIMUM CONSTRUCTION RADIUS (15)

CONCAVE CURVE

CONVEX CURVE

(12) Special consideration should be given to the design of vertical retaining walls subject to active lateral earth pressure. (13) Values based on full scale testing performed in October 2011. Copies of the full test reports are available at www.redi-rock.com. (14) The infilled unit weights shown here are based on full width units and an assumed concrete unit weight of 143 lb/ft3 (2291 kg/m3) and an assumed soil unit weight of 100 lb/ft3 (1602 kg/m3) They are reference values. Several factors can cause the unit weights of both concrete and infill soil to vary. The designer should use sound engineering judgement when assigning an infilled unit weight value for analysis. (15) The minimum construction radius stated is applicable to both concave and convex curved retaining wall sections. Increases to this minimum radius are required to account for wall batter. Special consideration should be given to block selection, facing batter, and wall height when selecting the minimum radius for the final wall alignment.

LENGTH(BACK)

HEIGHT (BACK)

HEIGHT (FRONT)

LENGTH(FRONT)

WIDTH (FACE TEXTURE)

MIDDLE - 60" (1520)

WIDTH(FORMLINETOBACK)

HEIGHT (FRONT)

LENGTH(FRONT)

WIDTH (FACE TEXTURE)

HALF MIDDLE - 60" (1520)

HEIGHT (BACK) (BACK)LENGTH

WIDTH(FORM LINETOBACK)

BOTTOM - 60" (1520)

HALF BOTTOM - 60" (1520)

Redi-Rock 60" (1520mm) wide, 9" (230 mm) Setback Retaining Blocks

Redi-Rock 60" (1520 mm) wide, 9" (230 mm) Setback Retaining Blocks

The Redi-Rock 60” (1520mm) Retaining wall blocks are machine-placed, wet-cast, precast modular block units manufactured from first-purpose, non-reconstituted concrete and intended for constructing dry-stacked modular retaining wall systems. The block units are manufactured from structural-grade concrete mixes in accordance with ASTM C94 or ASTM C685 that produce a finished unit with excellent resistance to freeze-thaw, deicing chemical exposure, and submerged conditions in both fresh water and salt water applications. All Redi-Rock Retaining wall products are manufactured and distributed through an international network of individually-owned, licensed precast concrete manufacturers.

DIMENSIONAL PROPERTIES

DIMENSIONS (1)

HEIGHT (FRONT OF BLOCK)

HEIGHT (BACK OF BLOCK)

LENGTH (FRONT OF BLOCK)

LENGTH (BACK OF BLOCK)

MIDDLE BOTTOM

SHIPPING/HANDLING WEIGHT (2)

LIMESTONE/COBBLESTONE FACE

MIDDLE BOTTOM

2213 16 ± 1 4 (579 ± 6) 83 8 ± 1 4 (231 ± 6) 54 5 8 ± 1 2 (1387 ± 13) PLUS ± 5 3 8 (136) FACE TEXTURE

HALF MIDDLE HALF BOTTOM

± 9.37 ft3 (0.264 m3)

± 9.12ft3 (0.258 m3)

± 9.80 ft3 (0.276 m3)

± 9.55 ft3 (0.270 m3)

HALF MIDDLE HALF BOTTOM

±1340 lb (608 kg)

± 1401 lb (635 kg)

LEDGESTONE FACE ± 3356 lb (1522 kg)

(1) All dimensions are inches (mm)

± 3226 lb (1463 kg)

± 1305 lb (592 kg)

(2) Weight shown is based on an assumed concrete unit weight of 143 lb/ft 3 (2291 kg/m3). Actual weights will vary.

CONCRETE MIX PROPERTIES (3)

± 1366 lb (620 kg)

WATER-SOLUBLE CHLORIDE ION (Cl -) CONTENT IN CONCRETE, PERCENT BY WEIGHT OF CEMENT (8)

CHLORIDE AS Cl - CONCENTRATION IN MIXING

TOTAL OF FLY ASH OR OTHER POZZOLANS AND SILICA FUME (10)

ALKALI-AGGREGATE REACTIVITY MITIGATION PER ACI 201

(3) Concrete mix properties are in general accordance with ACI 318 durability requirements. Research has shown that concrete manufactured to these standards demonstrates good durability and performance. When these requirements are followed, specific freeze-thaw testing of the concrete is typically NOT required. (4) Exposure class is as described in ACI 318. “MODERATE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and occasional exposure to moisture. “SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture. “VERY SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture and exposed to deicing chemicals. Exposure class should be specified by owner/purchaser prior to order placement. Longer lead times may be required for block units manufactured for “severe” and “very severe” exposure classes.

(5) Test method ASTM C39.

(6) Defined in ASTM C33 Table 3 Limits for Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements of Coarse Aggregate for Concrete.

(7) Test method ASTM C231.

(8) Test method ASTM C1218 at age between 28 and 42 days.

(9) The total cementitious material also includes ASTM C150, C595, C845, and C1157 cement. The maximum percentages shall include:

(a) Fly ash or other pozzolans in type IP, blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(b) Slag used in the manufacture of an IS blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(c) Silica fume, ASTM C1240, present in a blended cement.

(10) Fly ash or other pozzolans and silica fume shall constitute no more than 25 and 10 percent, respectively, of the total weight of the cementitious materials.

(11) Prescriptive limits shown may be waived for concrete mixes that demonstrate excellent freeze/thaw durability in a detailed and current testing program.

Redi-Rock 60" (1520mm) wide, 9" (230 mm) Setback Retaining Blocks

Redi-Rock 60" (1520 mm) wide, 9" (230 mm) Setback Retaining Blocks

The Redi-Rock 60” (1520mm) Retaining wall blocks are machine-placed, wet-cast, precast modular block units manufactured from first-purpose, non-reconstituted concrete and intended for constructing dry-stacked modular retaining wall systems. The block units are manufactured from structural-grade concrete mixes in accordance with ASTM C94 or ASTM C685 that produce a finished unit with excellent resistance to freeze-thaw, deicing chemical exposure, and submerged conditions in both fresh water and salt water applications. All Redi-Rock Retaining wall products are manufactured and distributed through an international network of individually-owned, licensed precast concrete manufacturers.

DIMENSIONAL PROPERTIES

DIMENSIONS (1)

HEIGHT (FRONT OF BLOCK)

HEIGHT (BACK OF BLOCK)

LENGTH (FRONT OF BLOCK)

LENGTH (BACK OF BLOCK)

5 8 ± 1 2 (1387 ± 13) PLUS ± 5 3 8 (136) FACE TEXTURE

HALF MIDDLE HALF BOTTOM MIDDLE BOTTOM

SHIPPING/HANDLING WEIGHT (2)

LIMESTONE/COBBLESTONE FACE

LEDGESTONE FACE ± 3356 lb (1522 kg) ± 3226 lb (1463 kg)

(1) All dimensions are inches (mm)

CONCRETE MIX PROPERTIES (3)

9.80 ft3 (0.276 m3)

HALF MIDDLE HALF BOTTOM MIDDLE BOTTOM

±1340 lb (608 kg) ± 1305 lb (592 kg)

9.55 ft3 (0.270 m3) ± 1401 lb (635 kg) ± 1366 lb (620 kg) ± 9.37 ft3 (0.264 m3) ± 9.12ft3 (0.258 m3)

(2) Weight shown is based on an assumed concrete unit weight of 143 lb/ft 3 (2291 kg/m3). Actual weights will vary.

MAXIMUM PERCENTAGE OF TOTAL CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS BY WEIGHT (9, 11) (VERY SEVERE EXPOSURE CLASS ONLY)

TOTAL OF FLY ASH OR OTHER POZZOLANS AND SILICA FUME (10)

ALKALI-AGGREGATE REACTIVITY MITIGATION PER ACI 201

(3) Concrete mix properties are in general accordance with ACI 318 durability requirements. Research has shown that concrete manufactured to these standards demonstrates good durability and performance. When these requirements are followed, specific freeze-thaw testing of the concrete is typically NOT required.

(4) Exposure class is as described in ACI 318. “MODERATE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and occasional exposure to moisture. “SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture. “VERY SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture and exposed to deicing chemicals. Exposure class should be specified by owner/purchaser prior to order placement. Longer lead times may be required for block units manufactured for “severe” and “very severe” exposure classes.

(5) Test method ASTM C39.

(6) Defined in ASTM C33 Table 3 Limits for Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements of Coarse Aggregate for Concrete.

(7) Test method ASTM C231.

(8) Test method ASTM C1218 at age between 28 and 42 days.

(9) The total cementitious material also includes ASTM C150, C595, C845, and C1157 cement. The maximum percentages shall include:

(a) Fly ash or other pozzolans in type IP, blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(b) Slag used in the manufacture of an IS blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(c) Silica fume, ASTM C1240, present in a blended cement.

(10) Fly ash or other pozzolans and silica fume shall constitute no more than 25 and 10 percent, respectively, of the total weight of the cementitious materials.

(11) Prescriptive limits shown may be waived for concrete mixes that demonstrate excellent freeze/thaw durability in a detailed and current testing program.

Redi-Rock 52" (1320mm) XL Hollow-Core Retaining Blocks R-5236HC 52" (1,320 mm) Hollow-Core Retaining Blocks

The Redi-Rock 52” (1,320 mm) XL retaining wall blocks are machine-placed, wet-cast, precast modular block units manufactured from first-purpose, non-reconstituted concrete and intended for use in the construction of dry-stacked modular retaining wall systems. The block units are manufactured from structural-grade concrete mixes in accordance with ASTM C94 or ASTM C685 that produce a finished unit with excellent resistance to freeze-thaw, deicing chemical exposure, and submerged conditions in both fresh water and salt water applications. All Redi-Rock retaining wall products are manufactured and distributed through an international network of individually-owned, licensed precast concrete manufacturers.

DIMENSIONAL PROPERTIES

DIMENSIONS (1)

HEIGHT (FRONT OF BLOCK)

LENGTH (FRONT OF BLOCK)

LENGTH (BACK OF BLOCK)

WIDTH

CONCRETE VOLUME HEIGHT (BACK OF BLOCK)

LEDGESTONE FACE

SHIPPING/HANDLING WEIGHT (2)

LEDGESTONE FACE

23.29 ft3 (0.660 m3)±

3330 lb (1510 kg)±

(1) All dimensions are inches (mm) (2) Weight shown is based on an assumed concrete unit weight of 143 lb/ft3 (2291 kg/m3). Actual weights will vary.

CONCRETE MIX PROPERTIES (3)

AIR CONTENT (7)

TOTAL OF FLY ASH OR OTHER POZZOLANS AND SILICA FUME (11)

ALKALI-AGGREGATE REACTIVITY MITIGATION per ACI 201

(3) Concrete mix properties are in general accordance with ACI 318 durability requirements. Research has shown that concrete manufactured to these standards demonstrates good durability and performance. When these requirements are followed, specific freeze-thaw testing of the concrete is typically NOT required.

(4) Exposure class is as described in ACI 318. “MODERATE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and occasional exposure to moisture. “SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture. “VERY SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture and exposed to deicing chemicals. Exposure class should be specified by owner/purchaser prior to order placement. Longer lead times may be required for block units manufactured for “severe” and “very severe” exposure classes.

(5) Test method ASTM C39.

(6) Defined in ASTM C33 Table 3 Limits for Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements of Coarse Aggregate for Concrete.

(7) Test method ASTM C231.

(8) Test method ASTM C1218 at age between 28 and 42 days.

(9) Where used in high sulfate environments or where alkali-silica reactivity is an issue, water soluble chloride shall be limited to no more than trace amounts (from impurities in concrete-making components, not intended constituents.)

(10) The total cementitious material also includes ASTM C150, C595, C845, and C1157 cement. The maximum percentages shall include:

(a) Fly ash or other pozzolans in type IP, blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(b) Slag used in the manufacture of an IS blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(c) Silica fume, ASTM C1240, present in a blended cement.

(11) Fly ash or other pozzolans and silica fume shall constitute no more than 25 and 10 percent, respectively, of the total weight of the cementitious materials.

(12) Prescriptive limits shown may be waived for concrete mixes that demonstrate excellent freeze/thaw durability in a detailed and current testing program.

Redi-Rock 52" (1320mm) XL Hollow-Core Retaining Blocks

R-5236HC 52" (1,320 mm) Hollow-Core Retaining Blocks

DESIGN PROPERTIES

HORIZONTAL SETBACK / WALL FACE BATTER

31 4 inches (83 mm) PER COURSE

Sp(1)

INFILLED UNIT WEIGHT FOR WALL STABILITY CALCULATIONS (14)

MINIMUM CONSTRUCTION RADIUS (15)

CONCAVE CURVE

CONVEX CURVE

(13) Values based on full scale testing performed in 2017 and 2018. Copies of the full test reports are available at www.redi-rock.com. (14) The infilled unit weights shown here are based on an assumed concrete unit weight of 143 lb/ft3 (2291 kg/m3) and an assumed soil unit weight of 100 lb/ft3 (1602 kN/m3). They are reference values. Several factors can cause the unit weights of both concrete and infill soil to vary. The designer should use sound engineering judgement when assigning an infilled unit weight value for analysis. (15) The minimum construction radius stated is applicable to both concave and convex curved retaining wall sections. Increases to this minimum radius are required to account for wall batter. Special consideration should be given to block selection, facing batter, and wall height when selecting the minimum radius for the final wall alignment.

SHEAR KNOBS @ 23 (584) OC, TYP.

LENGTH (BACK)

WIDTH (FACE TEXTURE) HEIGHT (FRONT) HEIGHT (BACK)

WIDTH (FORM LINE TO BACK) LENGTH (FRONT)

Redi-Rock 72" (1830mm) XL Hollow-Core Retaining Blocks R-7236HC 72" (1,830 mm) Hollow-Core Retaining Blocks

The Redi-Rock 72” (1,830 mm) XL retaining wall blocks are machine-placed, wet-cast, precast modular block units manufactured from first-purpose, non-reconstituted concrete and intended for use in the construction of dry-stacked modular retaining wall systems. The block units are manufactured from structural-grade concrete mixes in accordance with ASTM C94 or ASTM C685 that produce a finished unit with excellent resistance to freeze-thaw, deicing chemical exposure, and submerged conditions in both fresh water and salt water applications. All Redi-Rock retaining wall products are manufactured and distributed through an international network of individually-owned, licensed precast concrete manufacturers.

DIMENSIONAL PROPERTIES

DIMENSIONS (1)

HEIGHT (FRONT OF BLOCK)

LENGTH (FRONT OF BLOCK)

LENGTH (BACK OF BLOCK)

WIDTH

CONCRETE VOLUME HEIGHT (BACK OF BLOCK)

LEDGESTONE FACE

SHIPPING/HANDLING WEIGHT (2)

LEDGESTONE FACE

29.10 ft3 (0.824 m3)±

4160 lb (1890 kg)±

(1) All dimensions are inches (mm) (2) Weight shown is based on an assumed concrete unit weight of 143 lb/ft3 (2291 kg/m3). Actual weights will vary.

CONCRETE MIX PROPERTIES (3)

AIR CONTENT (7)

TOTAL OF FLY ASH OR OTHER POZZOLANS AND SILICA FUME (11)

ALKALI-AGGREGATE REACTIVITY MITIGATION per ACI 201

(3) Concrete mix properties are in general accordance with ACI 318 durability requirements. Research has shown that concrete manufactured to these standards demonstrates good durability and performance. When these requirements are followed, specific freeze-thaw testing of the concrete is typically NOT required.

(4) Exposure class is as described in ACI 318. “MODERATE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and occasional exposure to moisture. “SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture. “VERY SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture and exposed to deicing chemicals. Exposure class should be specified by owner/purchaser prior to order placement. Longer lead times may be required for block units manufactured for “severe” and “very severe” exposure classes.

(5) Test method ASTM C39.

(6) Defined in ASTM C33 Table 3 Limits for Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements of Coarse Aggregate for Concrete.

(7) Test method ASTM C231.

(8) Test method ASTM C1218 at age between 28 and 42 days.

(9) Where used in high sulfate environments or where alkali-silica reactivity is an issue, water soluble chloride shall be limited to no more than trace amounts (from impurities in concrete-making components, not intended constituents.)

(10) The total cementitious material also includes ASTM C150, C595, C845, and C1157 cement. The maximum percentages shall include:

(a) Fly ash or other pozzolans in type IP, blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(b) Slag used in the manufacture of an IS blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(c) Silica fume, ASTM C1240, present in a blended cement.

(11) Fly ash or other pozzolans and silica fume shall constitute no more than 25 and 10 percent, respectively, of the total weight of the cementitious materials.

(12) Prescriptive limits shown may be waived for concrete mixes that demonstrate excellent freeze/thaw durability in a detailed and current testing program.

Redi-Rock 72" (1830mm) XL Hollow-Core Retaining Blocks R-7236HC 72" (1,830 mm) Hollow-Core Retaining Blocks

The Redi-Rock 72” (1,830 mm) XL retaining wall blocks are machine-placed, wet-cast, precast modular block units manufactured from first-purpose, non-reconstituted concrete and intended for use in the construction of dry-stacked modular retaining wall systems. The block units are manufactured from structural-grade concrete mixes in accordance with ASTM C94 or ASTM C685 that produce a finished unit with excellent resistance to freeze-thaw, deicing chemical exposure, and submerged conditions in both fresh water and salt water applications. All Redi-Rock retaining wall products are manufactured and distributed through an international network of individually-owned, licensed precast concrete manufacturers.

DIMENSIONAL PROPERTIES

DIMENSIONS (1)

HEIGHT (FRONT OF BLOCK)

HEIGHT (BACK OF BLOCK)

LENGTH (FRONT OF BLOCK)

LENGTH (BACK OF BLOCK)

CONCRETE VOLUME

LEDGESTONE FACE

SHIPPING/HANDLING WEIGHT (2)

LEDGESTONE FACE

29.10 ft3 (0.824 m3)±

4160 lb (1890 kg)±

(1) All dimensions are inches (mm) (2) Weight shown is based on an assumed concrete unit weight of 143 lb/ft3 (2291 kg/m3). Actual weights will vary.

CONCRETE MIX PROPERTIES (3)

AIR CONTENT (7)

TOTAL OF FLY ASH OR OTHER POZZOLANS AND SILICA FUME (11)

ALKALI-AGGREGATE REACTIVITY MITIGATION per ACI 201

(3) Concrete mix properties are in general accordance with ACI 318 durability requirements. Research has shown that concrete manufactured to these standards demonstrates good durability and performance. When these requirements are followed, specific freeze-thaw testing of the concrete is typically NOT required.

(4) Exposure class is as described in ACI 318. “MODERATE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and occasional exposure to moisture. “SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture. “VERY SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture and exposed to deicing chemicals. Exposure class should be specified by owner/purchaser prior to order placement. Longer lead times may be required for block units manufactured for “severe” and “very severe” exposure classes.

(5) Test method ASTM C39.

(6) Defined in ASTM C33 Table 3 Limits for Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements of Coarse Aggregate for Concrete.

(7) Test method ASTM C231.

(8) Test method ASTM C1218 at age between 28 and 42 days.

(9) Where used in high sulfate environments or where alkali-silica reactivity is an issue, water soluble chloride shall be limited to no more than trace amounts (from impurities in concrete-making components, not intended constituents.)

(10) The total cementitious material also includes ASTM C150, C595, C845, and C1157 cement. The maximum percentages shall include:

(a) Fly ash or other pozzolans in type IP, blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(b) Slag used in the manufacture of an IS blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(c) Silica fume, ASTM C1240, present in a blended cement.

(11) Fly ash or other pozzolans and silica fume shall constitute no more than 25 and 10 percent, respectively, of the total weight of the cementitious materials.

(12) Prescriptive limits shown may be waived for concrete mixes that demonstrate excellent freeze/thaw durability in a detailed and current testing program.

Redi-Rock 96" (2440mm) XL Hollow-Core Retaining Blocks R-9636HC 96" (2,440 mm) Hollow-Core Retaining Blocks

The Redi-Rock 96” (2,440 mm) XL retaining wall blocks are machine-placed, wet-cast, precast modular block units manufactured from first-purpose, non-reconstituted concrete and intended for use in the construction of dry-stacked modular retaining wall systems. The block units are manufactured from structural-grade concrete mixes in accordance with ASTM C94 or ASTM C685 that produce a finished unit with excellent resistance to freeze-thaw, deicing chemical exposure, and submerged conditions in both fresh water and salt water applications. All Redi-Rock retaining wall products are manufactured and distributed through an international network of individually-owned, licensed precast concrete manufacturers.

DIMENSIONAL PROPERTIES

DIMENSIONS (1)

HEIGHT (FRONT OF BLOCK)

LENGTH (FRONT OF BLOCK)

LENGTH (BACK OF BLOCK)

WIDTH

CONCRETE VOLUME HEIGHT (BACK OF BLOCK)

LEDGESTONE FACE

SHIPPING/HANDLING WEIGHT (2)

LEDGESTONE FACE

33.83 ft3 (0.958 m3)±

4840 lb (2190 kg)±

(1) All dimensions are inches (mm) (2) Weight shown is based on an assumed concrete unit weight of 143 lb/ft3 (2291 kg/m3). Actual weights will vary.

CONCRETE MIX PROPERTIES (3)

AIR CONTENT (7)

(Cl-)

TOTAL OF FLY ASH OR OTHER POZZOLANS AND SILICA FUME (11)

ALKALI-AGGREGATE REACTIVITY MITIGATION per ACI 201

(3) Concrete mix properties are in general accordance with ACI 318 durability requirements. Research has shown that concrete manufactured to these standards demonstrates good durability and performance. When these requirements are followed, specific freeze-thaw testing of the concrete is typically NOT required.

(4) Exposure class is as described in ACI 318. “MODERATE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and occasional exposure to moisture. “SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture. “VERY SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture and exposed to deicing chemicals. Exposure class should be specified by owner/purchaser prior to order placement. Longer lead times may be required for block units manufactured for “severe” and “very severe” exposure classes.

(5) Test method ASTM C39.

(6) Defined in ASTM C33 Table 3 Limits for Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements of Coarse Aggregate for Concrete.

(7) Test method ASTM C231.

(8) Test method ASTM C1218 at age between 28 and 42 days.

(9) Where used in high sulfate environments or where alkali-silica reactivity is an issue, water soluble chloride shall be limited to no more than trace amounts (from impurities in concrete-making components, not intended constituents.)

(10) The total cementitious material also includes ASTM C150, C595, C845, and C1157 cement. The maximum percentages shall include:

(a) Fly ash or other pozzolans in type IP, blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(b) Slag used in the manufacture of an IS blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(c) Silica fume, ASTM C1240, present in a blended cement.

(11) Fly ash or other pozzolans and silica fume shall constitute no more than 25 and 10 percent, respectively, of the total weight of the cementitious materials.

(12) Prescriptive limits shown may be waived for concrete mixes that demonstrate excellent freeze/thaw durability in a detailed and current testing program.

Redi-Rock 96" (2440mm) XL Hollow-Core Retaining Blocks

R-9636HC 96" (2,440 mm) Hollow-Core Retaining Blocks

DESIGN PROPERTIES

HORIZONTAL SETBACK / WALL FACE BATTER

31 4 inches (83 mm) PER COURSE

Sp(1)

INFILLED UNIT WEIGHT FOR WALL STABILITY CALCULATIONS (14)

MINIMUM CONSTRUCTION RADIUS (15)

CONCAVE CURVE

CONVEX CURVE

(13) Values based on full scale testing performed in 2017 and 2018. Copies of the full test reports are available at www.redi-rock.com. (14) The infilled unit weights shown here are based on an assumed concrete unit weight of 143 lb/ft3 (2291 kg/m3) and an assumed soil unit weight of 100 lb/ft3 (1602 kN/m3). They are reference values. Several factors can cause the unit weights of both concrete and infill soil to vary. The designer should use sound engineering judgement when assigning an infilled unit weight value for analysis. (15) The minimum construction radius stated is applicable to both concave and convex curved retaining wall sections. Increases to this minimum radius are required to account for wall batter. Special consideration should be given to block selection, facing batter, and wall height when selecting the minimum radius for the final wall alignment.

SHEAR KNOBS @ 23 (584) OC, TYP.

WIDTH (FORM LINE TO BACK) LENGTH (FRONT) WIDTH (FACE TEXTURE)

Redi-Rock Freestanding Straight Blocks

Redi-Rock Freestanding Straight Blocks

The Redi-Rock Freestanding wall units are machine-placed, wet-cast, precast modular block units manufactured from first-purpose, non-reconstituted concrete and intended to be used exclusively or in combination with dry-stacked modular retaining wall blocks. These units are manufactured from structural-grade concrete mixes in accordance with ASTM C94 or ASTM C685 that produce a finished unit with excellent resistance to freeze-thaw, deicing chemical exposure, and submerged conditions in both fresh water and salt water applications. All Redi-Rock products are manufactured and distributed through an international network of individually-owned, licensed precast concrete manufacturers.

DIMENSIONAL PROPERTIES

DIMENSIONS (1)

HEIGHT: 18 ± 3 16 (457 ± 5)

CONCRETE VOLUME

LIMESTONE/COBBLESTONE FACE LEDGESTONE FACE

SHIPPING/HANDLING WEIGHT (2)

LIMESTONE/COBBLESTONE FACE

LEDGESTONE FACE

(1) All dimensions are inches (mm)

(0.244 m3) ± 1523 lb (691 kg) ± 1375 lb (623 kg) ± 1407 lb (638 kg) LENGTH: 46 1 8 ± 1 2 (1172 ± 13)

ft3 (0.302 m3)

WIDTH: ± 24 (610) LEDGESTONE / COBBLESTONE, ± 23 (584) LIMESTONE ±9.66 ft3 (0.273 m3) ±9.84 ft3 (0.279 m3) ±8.84

(2) Weight shown is based on an assumed concrete unit weight of 143 lb/ft 3 (2291 kg/m3). Actual weights will vary.

CONCRETE MIX PROPERTIES (2)

THAW EXPOSURE CLASS (4)

MAXIMUM WATER-SOLUBLE CHLORIDE ION (Cl -) CONTENT IN CONCRETE, PERCENT BY WEIGHT OF CEMENT (8)

TOTAL OF FLY ASH OR OTHER POZZOLANS AND SILICA FUME (10) AIR CONTENT (7)

(3) Concrete mix properties are in general accordance with ACI 318 durability requirements. Research has shown that concrete manufactured to these standards demonstrates good durability and performance. When these requirements are followed, specific freeze-thaw testing of the concrete is typically NOT required.

(4) Exposure class is as described in ACI 318. “MODERATE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and occasional exposure to moisture. “SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture. “VERY SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture and exposed to deicing chemicals. Exposure class should be specified by owner/purchaser prior to order placement. Longer lead times may be required for block units manufactured for “severe” and “very severe” exposure classes.

(5) Test method ASTM C39.

(6) Defined in ASTM C33 Table 3 Limits for Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements of Coarse Aggregate for Concrete.

(7) Test method ASTM C231.

(8) Test method ASTM C1218 at age between 28 and 42 days.

(9) The total cementitious material also includes ASTM C150, C595, C845, and C1157 cement. The maximum percentages shall include:

(a) Fly ash or other pozzolans in type IP, blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(b) Slag used in the manufacture of an IS blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(c) Silica fume, ASTM C1240, present in a blended cement.

(10) Fly ash or other pozzolans and silica fume shall constitute no more than 25 and 10 percent, respectively, of the total weight of the cementitious materials.

Redi-Rock Freestanding Variable Radius Blocks

Redi-Rock Freestanding Variable Radius Blocks

The Redi-Rock Freestanding wall units are machine-placed, wet-cast, precast modular block units manufactured from first-purpose, non-reconstituted concrete and intended to be used exclusively or in combination with dry-stacked modular retaining wall blocks. These units are manufactured from structural-grade concrete mixes in accordance with ASTM C94 or ASTM C685 that produce a finished unit with excellent resistance to freeze-thaw, deicing chemical exposure, and submerged conditions in both fresh water and salt water applications. All Redi-Rock products are manufactured and distributed through an international network of individually-owned, licensed precast concrete manufacturers.

DIMENSIONAL PROPERTIES

DIMENSIONS (1)

HEIGHT: 18 ± 3 16 (457 ± 5)

CONCRETE VOLUME

LIMESTONE/COBBLESTONE FACE

LEDGESTONE FACE

SHIPPING/HANDLING WEIGHT (2)

LIMESTONE/COBBLESTONE FACE

LEDGESTONE FACE

(1) All dimensions are inches (mm)

LENGTH: 46 1 8 ± 1 2 (1172 ± 13)

WIDTH: ± 24 (610) LEDGESTONE / COBBLESTONE, ± 23 (584) LIMESTONE ±8.66 ft3 (0.245 m3) ±8.86 ft3 (0.251 m3) ±7.86 ft3 (0.223 m3)

ft3 (0.273 m3)

1380 lb (626 kg)

1235 lb (560 kg) ± 1267 lb (574 kg)

(2) Weight shown is based on an assumed concrete unit weight of 143 lb/ft 3 (2291 kg/m3). Actual weights will vary.

CONCRETE MIX PROPERTIES (2)

THAW EXPOSURE CLASS (4)

MAXIMUM WATER-SOLUBLE CHLORIDE ION (Cl -) CONTENT IN CONCRETE, PERCENT BY WEIGHT OF CEMENT (8) MAXIMUM CHLORIDE AS Cl - CONCENTRATION

AIR CONTENT (7)

TOTAL OF FLY ASH OR OTHER POZZOLANS AND SILICA FUME (10)

(3) Concrete mix properties are in general accordance with ACI 318 durability requirements. Research has shown that concrete manufactured to these standards demonstrates good durability and performance. When these requirements are followed, specific freeze-thaw testing of the concrete is typically NOT required. (4) Exposure class is as described in ACI 318. “MODERATE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and occasional exposure to moisture. “SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture. “VERY SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture and exposed to deicing chemicals. Exposure class should be specified by owner/purchaser prior to order placement. Longer lead times may be required for block units manufactured for “severe” and “very severe” exposure classes.

(5) Test method ASTM C39.

(6) Defined in ASTM C33 Table 3 Limits for Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements of Coarse Aggregate for Concrete.

(7) Test method ASTM C231.

(8) Test method ASTM C1218 at age between 28 and 42 days.

(9) The total cementitious material also includes ASTM C150, C595, C845, and C1157 cement. The maximum percentages shall include:

(a) Fly ash or other pozzolans in type IP, blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(b) Slag used in the manufacture of an IS blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(c) Silica fume, ASTM C1240, present in a blended cement.

(10) Fly ash or other pozzolans and silica fume shall constitute no more than 25 and 10 percent, respectively, of the total weight of the cementitious materials.

Redi-Rock Hollow-Core Freestanding Blocks Redi-Rock Hollow-Core Freestanding Blocks

The Redi-Rock Hollow-Core Freestanding wall units are machine-placed, wet-cast, precast modular block units manufactured from first-purpose, non-reconstituted concrete and intended to be used exclusively or in combination with dry-stacked modular retaining wall blocks. These units are manufactured from structural-grade concrete mixes in accordance with ASTM C94 or ASTM C685 that produce a finished unit with excellent resistance to freeze-thaw, deicing chemical exposure, and submerged conditions in both fresh water and salt water applications. All Redi-Rock products are manufactured and distributed through an international network of individually-owned, licensed precast concrete manufacturers.

DIMENSIONAL

PROPERTIES

DIMENSIONS (1)

HEIGHT: 18 ± 3 16 (457 ± 5)

LIMESTONE/COBBLESTONE FACE

LEDGESTONE FACE

SHIPPING/HANDLING WEIGHT (2)

LIMESTONE/COBBLESTONE FACE LEDGESTONE FACE

LENGTH: 46 1 8 ± 1 2 (1172 ± 13)

CONCRETE VOLUME CONCRETE MIX PROPERTIES (2)

WIDTH: 24 (610) ± LEDGESTONE / COBBLESTONE, 23 (584) ± LIMESTONE

HOLLOW-CORE HALF CORNER

HALF CORNER

HOLLOW-CORE HALF CORNER

lb (349 kg) ±

lb (175 kg) ±

(1) All dimensions are inches (mm) (2) Weight shown is based on an assumed concrete unit weight of 143 lb/ft3 (2291 kg/m3). Actual weights will vary.

lb (441 kg) ±

HALF CORNER

± 545 lb (247 kg) ±

lb (229 kg) ±

WATER-SOLUBLE CHLORIDE ION (Cl-) CONTENT IN CONCRETE, PERCENT BY WEIGHT OF CEMENT (8,9)

CHLORIDE AS Cl- CONCENTRATION IN MIXING WATER,

MAXIMUM PERCENTAGE OF TOTAL CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS BY WEIGHT (10) (VERY SEVERE EXPOSURE CLASS ONLY)

TOTAL OF FLY ASH OR OTHER POZZOLANS AND SILICA FUME (11) AIR

(3) Concrete mix properties are in general accordance with ACI 318 durability requirements. Research has shown that concrete manufactured to these standards demonstrates good durability and performance. When these requirements are followed, specific freeze-thaw testing of the concrete is typically NOT required.

(4) Exposure class is as described in ACI 318. “MODERATE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and occasional exposure to moisture. “SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture. “VERY SEVERE” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture and exposed to deicing chemicals. Exposure class should be specified by owner/purchaser prior to order placement. Longer lead times may be required for block units manufactured for “severe” and “very severe” exposure classes.

(5) Test method ASTM C39.

(6) Defined in ASTM C33 Table 3 Limits for Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements of Coarse Aggregate for Concrete.

(7) Test method ASTM C231.

(8) Test method ASTM C1218 at age between 28 and 42 days.

(9) Where used in high sulfate environments or where alkali-silica reactivity is an issue, water soluble chloride shall be limited to no more than trace amounts (from impurities in concrete-making components, not intended constituents.)

(10) The total cementitious material also includes ASTM C150, C595, C845, and C1157 cement. The maximum percentages shall include:

(a) Fly ash or other pozzolans in type IP, blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(b) Slag used in the manufacture of an IS blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157.

(c) Silica fume, ASTM C1240, present in a blended cement.

(11) Fly ash or other pozzolans and silica fume shall constitute no more than 25 and 10 percent, respectively, of the total weight of the cementitious materials.

NOTES:

Thank you for choosing Redi-Rock International to help you make precast modular blocks. This user manual, used in conjunction with the Producer Secure Site, is intended to assist you in the manufacturing process.

This manual outlines general practices and procedures, but each manufacturer is responsible for creating a site-specific safety plan for their facility, as scenarios and situations vary across locations. If you need to set up a company safety program, we recommend visiting www.osha.gov or calling 1-800-321-OSHA (6742) to find safety-training materials specific to your company.

All manufacturers should abide by all federal, state, and local safety regulations.

Turn static files into dynamic content formats.

Create a flipbook
Issuu converts static files into: digital portfolios, online yearbooks, online catalogs, digital photo albums and more. Sign up and create your flipbook.